The Shepheards kalender newly augmented and corrected.

The Shepheards Kalender.

The art science, and practice of the great Kalender of Shepheards, by example right fertile, and profitable unto all manner of people, and easie to be understood by mans wit, with divers additions newly adioyned there∣to, as hereafter followeth.

CHAP. I. A great question asked between the Shepheards touching the stars, and an answer made to the same question.

[illustration]

THe Shepheards in a morning before the day being in the fields, beheld the firmament that was fixed full of stars, one amongst the other said to his fellow, I demand of thee how many stars be on the twelve parts

of the Zodiack▪ that is under one sign only. The other shepheard answered and said, let be found a peece of land in a plain Country, as upon the plain of Salisbury, and that the said peece of land be xl miles long, and xxiiii. miles broad. After that, take great long nailes with great broad heads, as the nailes be that are made for cart-wheeles, as many as shall suffice for the said peece of land, and let the said nailes be stricken unto the heads, in the said peece of land, four fingers distant one from another, till that the peece of land be covered over from one side to the other: I say that there be as many stars contained under one signe only as there should be nailes struck in the foresaid peece of land, and there is as many under each of the other, and to the equipollent by the other places of the firmament. The first Shepheard demanded how wilt thou prove it? the second an∣swered and said, that no man is bound nor tied to prove things unpossible, and that it ought to suffice for shepheards touching this matter to beleeve simply without overmuch enquirie, of that their predecessors shepheards have said before.

[illustration]

Husbondrye

Thus endeth the Astro∣logy of shepheards, with the knowledge that they have of the stars, pla∣nets, and movings of the skies.

Hereafter followeth the saying of the shepheard to the Plowman.

How Plow men should doe.

PIers goe thou to plow▪ and take with thee thy wife, Delve and draw, sow barly, wheat, and rie, Of one make ten, this is perfect life, As saith Aristotle in his Philosophy. Thou need not study to know Astrologie For if the weather be not to thy pleasance. Thank ever God, of his divine ordinance.

Thus endeth the Plowman.

The Author.

IN the end of this book Who so list for to look, Therein he shall see, A ballad that saith this. He that many bookes reads, Cunning shall he be, Wisdome is soon caught, In many leaves it is sought, And some doth it find. But sloth that no book bought, For reason takes no thought, His thrift comes behind. And many one doth say, That Clarks ne tell may, What shall befall. They that this doe report, Be of the peevish sort, That little good can at all, They know that drink doth slake the thirst, And when their eies is full of dust, Yet may they sit and shale peason, For and Clerkes shew them books of cunning, They bid them lay them up a sunneing, Vnto another season.

[illustration]

And if we speak of Astronomie, They will say it is a great lye, For they ken no other reason: But all that knoweth good and better, As gentlemen that loveth sweet and sweeter, Wisdom with them is not geason.

The Prologue of the Author that put this Book in writing.

[illustration]

AS here before time there was a Shepheard keeping Sheep in the Fields, which was no Clerk, nor had no understanding of the literal sence, nor of no manner of Scripture, nor Writing, but of his Natural wit and understanding said; Howbeit though li∣ving and dying be all at the pleasure of Almighty GOD, yet man may live by the course of Nature lxxii. years or more. This was his reason. And he saith, as much time as a man hath to grow in beauty, length, breadth,

and strength, so much time hath he to wax old and feeble to his end: But the term to grow in beauty, height and strength, is xxxvi, yeer, and the term to wax old, feeble, and weak, and turn to the earth ward, which is in all together lxxii. year. that he ought to live by course of nature. And they that dye before this time, often it is by violence and outrage done to their complexion and nature. But they that live above this term, is by good regiment and ensignments, after the which a man hath govern∣ned himself. To this purpose of living and dying, the said shepheard saith, the thing that we desire most in this world, is to live long, and the thing that wee most fear, is to dye soon: thus he travailed his understanding, and made great diligence to know and to do things possible and requisite for to live long whole, and ioyfully, which this present compost and Kalen∣der of Shepheards sheweth and teacheth. Wherefore we will shew you of the bodies celestiall, and of their nature and movings: and this present book is named the compost, for it comprehendeth fully all the compost, and more, for the daies, hours, and moments, and the new Moons, and the Eclipse of the Sunne and the Moon, and the signs that the Moon is in every day, and this book was made for them that be no Clarks: to bring them to great understanding.

He said also that the desire to live long was in his soul, the which alway lasteth, wherefore hee would that his desire was accomplished after death as afore. He said, sith the soul dieth not, and in her is the desire to live long, it should be an infallible pain, not to live after death, as afore, for he that li∣veth not after his corporal death, shall not have that that he hath desired, that is to wit, to live long, & should abide in eternal pain if his desire were not accomplished. So concluded the said Shepheard necessary things for him and other to know, and do that which appertaineth to live after death, as afore. And truth it is, that he which liveth but the life of this world only, though hee lived an hundred year, he lived not properly long: but he should live long, that at the end of this present life should begin the life eter∣nall that is to say, the life everlasting in heaven. So a man ought to per∣form his life in this world corporally, that he may live spiritually with∣out end. For as hee said, one shall live everlasting without dying, and when he hath the perdurable life, hee shall bee perfect. And also by this point, and none otherwise, shall be accomplished the desire of long living in this world. The foresaid Shepheard also knowledged, that the life of this world was soon past and gone, wherefore this Shepheard thought that lxxii. years in this vale of wretched misery is but a little and a small term of life to the everlasting, the which never shall have ending. And therefore he saith he that offereth himself here to live vertuously in this world, af∣ter this life he shall receive the sweet life that is sure and lasteth ever with∣out end. For though a man lived here an C. yeer and more, it is but a little term to the life to come. Therefore saith this shepheard, I will live soberly

with these small temporal goods that Iesus hath lent me, and ever to exile the desire of worldly riches and worldly worship. For they that labour for it, and have love to their goods, and vain worships, oft it parteth man from the heavenly treasure. It shutteth mans heart, that God may not en∣ter, and buildeth man a place of no rest in the low land of darknesse.

CHAP. II. Hereafter followeth another Prologue of the Master Shepheard, that sheweth and proveth the Authors Prologue true, that is before rehearsed, and so the shepheards dispute one with another, but this that followeth, the Master shepheard saith to the other, of the division of this Kalender.

[illustration]

Here beginneth the Master Shepheard.

IT is to be understood, that there be in the year four quarters, that are called Ver, Aestas, Autumnus, and Hyems▪ These de the four seasons of the year, as Prime-time is the spring of the year, as February, March, and April, these three months.

Then commeth Summer, as May, Iune, and Iuly: and these three months every hearb, grain, and tree is in his kind, & in his most strength and fairnesse, even at the highest.

Then commeth Autumne, as August, September, and October, then all these fruits waxe ripe, and be gathered and housed.

Then commeth November, December, and Ianuary, and these three months be the Winter, the time of little profit. We Shepheards say that the age of man is lxxii. years, and that we liken but to one whole year, for evermore we take six years to every month, as Ianuary, or Februa∣ry & so forth; for as the year changeth by the twelve months, into twelve sundry manners, so doth a man change himself twelve times in his life by twelve ages, and every age lasteth six year, if so be that he live to lxxii. for three times six maketh eighteen, and six times six maketh xxxvi. And then is man at the best, and also at the highest, and twelve times six maketh lxxii. and that is the age of a man.

Thus must ye reckon for every month six year or else it may be under∣stood by the four quarters and seasons of the year: So man is divided into four parts, as to youth, strength, wisedome, and age: He to be xviii. yeer yong, xviii. yeer strong, xviii. yeer in wisdome, and the fourth xviii yeer to go to the full age of lxxii.

And now to shew you how man changeth xii. times, as the xii months do.

TAke the first six yeer of Ianuary, the which is for no vertue nor strength, in that season nothing on the earth groweth. So man after he is born, till he be six year of age, is without wit, strength, or cunning, and may do nothing that profiteth.

Then commeth February, and then the days begin to wax in length, and the Sunne more hotter, then the fields begin to waxe green: So the other six yeers till he come to twelve, the child beginneth to grow bigger, & serve, and learn such as is taught him.

Then commeth March, in the which the laborer soweth the earth, & plan∣teth trees, & edifieth houses: the child in these six yeers waxeth big to learn doctrin & science, and to be fair & honest, for then he is xviii years of age.

Then commeth Aprill, that the earth and the trees are covered in green and flowers, and in every part goods increase abundantly: then com∣meth the child to gather the sweet flowers of hardinesse, but then beware that the cold winds & stormes of vices beat not down the flowers of good manners, that he should bring man to honor, for then he is xxiiii. yeer old.

Then commeth May, that is both fair and pleasant, for then birds sing in woods and Forrests night and day, the Sunne shineth hot: and as then is man most ioyfull and pleasant, and of livelier strength, and seeketh plaies, sports, and lusty pastime, for then he is full xxx years.

Then cometh Iune, and then is the sunne highest in his meridional, he may ascend no higher in his station, his glimering golden beams ripēs the corn; and when a man is xxxvi. year, he may ascend no more, for then hath nature given him beauty and strength at the full, and ripeneth the seeds of perfect understanding.

Then commeth Iuly, that our fruits been set a sunning, and our corn a hardning, but then the Sun beginneth a little for to descend downward; so man then goeth from youth toward age, and beginneth to acquaint him with sadnesse, for then he is xlii. year.

After that then commeth August, then we gather in our corn, and also the fruits of the earth; and then doth man his diligence to gather for to find himself withall, in the time that he may neither get nor win, and then af∣ter that vi. yeers, is he xlviii. year old.

Then commeth September, that wines be made, and the fruits of trees be gathered. And then therewithall he doth freshly beginne to garnish his house and make provision of needfull things for to live in winter, which draweth very neer and then is man in his most ioyful & couragious estate, prosperous in wisdome, purposing to gather, and keep as much as should be sufficient for him in his old age, when he may gather no more, and these six years maketh him liv. years.

And then commeth October, that all is into the foresaid house gathered but corn, and also other maner fruits; And also the labourer soweth new seeds in the earth, for the yeer to come. And then he that soweth nought shall nought gather. And then in these other six years, a man shall take himself unto God for to do penance & good works, and then the benefits the yeer after his death he may gather, and have spiritual profit, and then is man full in the term lx. year.

Then commeth November, that the days are very short, and the sun in manner giveth little heat, & the trees lose their leaves. The fields that were green look hory and gray. When all manner of herbs be hidde in the ground, and then appeareth no flowers: And then winter is come that a man hath understanding of age, and hath lost his kindly heat & strength: His teeth begin to rot, and also to chatter, and then hath he no more hope of long life, but desireth to come to the life everlasting, and these six for this month maketh him lx. and six years.

Then commeth December, full of cold, with frost and snow, with great winds and stormy weather, that a man may not labour nor nought do: the sun is then at the lowest that it may descēd, then the trees & the earth is hid in snow, then is it good to hold them nigh the fire, & to spend the goods that they gathered in summer: For then beginneth mans hair to wax white & gray, & his body crooked & feeble, & then he loseth the perfect understāding, and that six years maketh him full lxxii. year, and if he live any more, it is by his good guiding and dieting in his youth. Howbeit, it is possible

that a man may live till he be an hundred yeers of age, but there are but few that come thereto.

Wherefore I Shepheard said moreover, that of living or dying the hea∣venly bodies may stirre a man both to good and evill without doubt of a surety: but yet may a man withstand it by his own free will, to do what he will himself good or bad evermore. Above the which inclination is the might and will of God, that longeth the life of man by his goodnesse, or to take it short by his iustice.

Wherefore we will shew you of the bodies celestiall, and of the nature and movings: and this present book is named the Compost, for it compre∣hendeth fully all the compost and more, for the days▪ hours, & moments, and the new Moons, and the eclipse of the Sun and Moon, and of the sign that the Moon is in every day, and this book was made for them that are no Clerks, to bring them to great understanding.

And this Calender is divided into five parts.

The first, of our signs of the compost and the Kalender.

The second is, the tree of vices with the paines of hell.

The third is, the way of health of man: the tree of vertues.

The fourth is physick and governance of health.

The fift is, Astrology and physnomy, for to understand many decei∣vings, and which they be by likelihood, the which by nature are inclined and can do them, as you shall read ere you come to the end.

For to have the Shepheards understanding of their Kalender, ye should understand that the year is the measure of the time that the sunne passeth the twelve signs, returning to his first point, & is divided into the twelve months.

As Ianuary, February, March, and so forth to December.

So the sunne in these twelve months passeth by twelve signs one time.

The days of his entring into the signs in the Kalender, and the days also when he parteth the yeer, as the xii. months into lii. weeks, three hundred sixty and five days, and when bysext is, it is threescore and vi. one day, is xxiv. hours, every hour lx minutes. After these divisions yee must understand for every year three things.

The first speaketh of the Golden number.

The second of the letter dominicall

And the third is the letter tabular, in the which lyeth all the chief know∣ledge of this Kalender, for the which letter and number to understand all that they would, whether it be past or to come, ye shall put three figures after the Kalender, of the which the first shall shew the value and declara∣tion of the two other, and it is to be underst••••d that in four years, there is one Bys••xt, the which hath one day more than the other, and also hath two letters dominicals signed in one of the foresaid figures, and changeth

the latter day of S. Matthew, the which is vigill, and is put with the day upon one letter by himself.

Also the letters Ferials of this Kalender, be to be understood as they of the other kalenders, before the which are the numbers, and the other three after the letters ferials. First, for because the letters descendeth low, is the golden number above the day of the new Moon. And the which to be the hour and moments of the said month: which when they are in service before noon of the day above there. And when they are black service for afternoon of the same day in the places of the number, betokeneth that number where it is. The naturall day is to be understood from midnight to midnight xxiv houres, and shall serve the said numbers for the letters Ferials, xix. yeer complete from the year that this Kalender was made one thousand four hundred fourescore and seventeen, unto the yeer one thousand five hundred and sixteen. In the which yeer shall begin all to serve this golden number, and the other numbers after the letters ferials, all in the manner as they be before for the other xix yeers.

And all the remnant of the compost, and of the kalender is perpetual for the golden number, so shall they be xxxviii. yeers, of the which yeers, one thousand four hundred fourscore & seventeen is the first. The feasts of the kalender are in their daies, of the which the solennall are in red & storied in the unity, nigh the which unity in the end of the bodies, above every day is one letter of the A. b. c. for to understand in what signs the Moon is in that day. And yet the said letters and the rubrish, for the which shall be one figure before the Kalender, which shall shew how they should under∣stand it. This yeer of this present Kalender, which began to have course the first day of Ianuary .M.CCCC.xcvii. In the which raigneth for the golden number sixteen. The letter dominical A. The letter tabular f. and b. In the first lines, and their figures neerest the golden number xvi. the yeer of this Kalender.

To know the letter Dominical by the verse underneath.

Filius esto dei coelum bonus accipe gratis.

Or by these other verses here following.

Fructus alit Canos el gelica bellica danos. El genitir bona dat Finis amara cadat. Dat floris anni caler ejus gaudia busti, Cambit edens griffo boabel dicens fiat agur.

For to set the month.

A, dam, de, ge, bat, er, go, ci, phos, a, dri, phos.

For the golden number, and the new Moon.

Ter, nus, un, din, nod, octo, sex, quinque, tred, ambo, ve, cem, duc, Septem. quin, quar, tus, doc, io, ta, no, vem, vi, quar.

An ingenious practice or Compost of Shepheards.

Newly and subtilly shepheards have found a short practice for to know the golden number, the letter dominicall, & the tabular letters, as ensueth, the which for subtilty is difficil to be understood, if first it be not shewed by such as understand it well, but as to this it behoveth not to tarry & tra∣vel, for cause of the figures that ensigneth and sheweth how to find and know the said practice.

Finis canos agur ejus bona fructus, Dicens anni & bellica griffo dant amara El cambet gaudit dat alit fiet color Genitrix danos boabel flores cadat gelica Edens busti▪

Four secrets of the Compost of Shepheards.

Mobilis alta dies C, currens aureus octo Sexdeno cum D, non erit inferior, B, Veneris sancta, sed quinque tred ambo Maria, Nec erit in toto dicens similis simul octo.

The manner to know the festival daies on the hand▪ and on what days they bee.

WHo so will know on his hand when the holy days falleth, take heed of the same letters. A. b c. d e. f. g. The days of the week bee vii. one for Sunday, and for the other days vi. Put them in the ioynts of the left hand on iiii▪ fingers, and with the right hand they ought to be marked for the more certainty. A b c. on the back of the hand, and g. above, d e f. within the hād, Then ye ought to know in what place every month should be▪ A little af∣ter dam of g. b E. g. c. bee on the month of the little finger. F. a. on the leach finger. February and March on the learh finger together▪ April on g. May on b. Iune on the middle finger above ••▪ Iuly upon g. and Au∣gust upon c. September upon f. October on a. of the fourth finger; Then November above d. and December above f. of the little finger. And thus the twelve months be set on the fingers.

After, bran, pen, cru, lucy, the Embre dayes be set truly.

In each of these two lines here under, be as many sillables as there be festivall days in the yeer, and every day ought to be set on the joynts of the left hand as is shewed here in this present book.

January.

Cir, o, ia, nus, e, pi, lu, fe, la, nus, et, keu, fe, man, mar, an. Pis, ca, fab, ag, vin, cen, ti, pau, lum, iul, ag, que; ba, tilde.

February.

Bre, pur, blas, et, a, ue, fe, bru, o, sco, la, sli, ca, va, lent. Iul, con, um, ge, tur, cum, pe, tro, math, so, ci, e, tur.

March.

Mo, sed, mar, ci, us, bal, to, duth, kes, con, gre, go, ri, um, bo. Pat, ed, ward, cuth, be, ne, ca, pe, ma, ri, am, ge, ni, tri, cem.

Aprill.

Gil, gip, ric, et, am, bro, si, i, dat, a, pril, le, on, eu, fe, ti, bur, ci. Post, al, phe, fe, sta, ge, or, mar, ci, que, vi, ta, lis.

May.

Phi, li, cruc, may, i, un, la, tin, nic, gor, de, ne, re, i, que, Post, e, a, don, se, qui, tur, post, fal, phe, sest, ta, ger, ad, en, pe, que.

June.

Nic, mar, in, bo, ni, fa, med, co, lum, bar, ba, ci, ba, vi, ti. Bo, mar, marg, ed, ward, si, mil, la, ba, el, io, le, on, pe, pau.

July.

Ser, ui, iul, mar, ti, ni, tho, mo, que, fra, be, dic, ti, suth, un, ken. Ar, nulf, marg, prax, mag, ap, cris, ia, an, dor, sam, sun, ob, gre.

August.

Pe, steph, aug, gust, trans, do, ci, ro, lau, ti, bur, ri, ip, on. Sump, ta, sit, a, mag, ni, bar, tho, lo, ruff, ag, io, oon, fel, on, cut.

September.

E, gis, sep, cup, bert, ha, bet, nat, gort, gon, pro, thi, que, curt. Lam, ber, ti, quo, math, ma, mar, te, cle, fer, cip, da, con, mich, ier.

October.

Rem, le, o, fran, ci, fi, mar, tunc, dig, er, a, ni, a, ed. Post, lu, cas, iu, in, de, ro, ma, cris, pi, ni, si, no, nis, quin.

November.

Om, nis, tunc, sanc, ti, le, o, mar, ti, bri, ci, a, ni, a, ed. Pre, te, cle, gri, ka, li, ni, a, que, sat, an.

December.

E, le, gi, bar, ba, ni, co, con, cep, et, lu, ce, i al ma. O, sa, pi, en, que, tho, mas, pro, pe, nat, steph, io, tho, me, sil.

How every month praiseth it self of some good property.

January.

I Make me to be called Janivere, In my time is great storms of cold∣ness, For unto me no month of the year May compare, if I advance me doubtlesse, For in my time was (as clarks do expresse) Circumcised the Lord omnipotent, And adored by Kings of the Orient.

February.

I am February the most hardy, In my season, the pure mother Virginal Offered her sonne in the Temple truly, Making to God a present speciall Of Iesus Christ the King of kings all, Between the arms of the Bishop Simeon, To whom pray we to have his remission.

March.

March am I called in noblenesse flourishing, Which among months, am of great Nobless, For in my time all the fruits do bud and spring, To the service of man in great largess, And Lent is in me, the time of holiness, That every man ought to have repentance Of his sins done by long continuance.

April.

Among all months I am iustly April, Fresh and wholesome unto each creature, And in my time the dulcet drops distill, Called Christall, as Poets put in Scripture, Causing all stones the longer to endure, In my time was the resurrection Of God and man, by divine election.

May.

Of all the months in the year I am King, Fourishing in beauty excellently, For in my time in vertue is all thing, Fields and Meads spred most beautiously, And birds sing with right sweet harmony, Reioycing lovers, with hot love all indued With fragrant flowers all about renued.

[illustration]

June.

Who of my season taketh right good heed, Ought not at all my name to ad••ul▪ For in my time, for all the commons weed, From sheep is shorn all the flesh and wool, And had in merchandise by great ships full, Over the sea; wherefore we ought to pray Vnto our Lord, and thank him night and day.

July.

If that my time were praised all aright, Among all months▪ I am one of the chief, For I enripe through my great force and might, Fruits of the earth to man and beasts relief, Feeding horses, kine, muttons, and strong beef, With other properties that I could tell; But I must passe, I may no longer dwell.

August.

I am named the hot month of August, For redolent heat of Phoebus brightnesse, In my time each man ought for to have lust To labour in harvest, with great businesse, To reap and sheef, eschuing idlenesse, And rise early with great diligence, Thanking our Lord of his great providence.

September.

Who can my name perfectly remember, With the commodities of my season, Ought of right to call me September, Plenteous of goods by all manner of reason, As wheat, rie, oats, beans, fitches and peason, Of which fruit every man ought to have in store, To live directly, and thank the Lord therefore.

October.

Among the other October I hight, Friend unto Vintners naturally, And in my time Bacchus is ready dight, All manner of wine to presse and clarify, Of which is sacred, as we see daily, The blessed body of Christ in sign of flesh & blood, Which is our hope, refection and food.

[illustration]

November.

I November will not abide behind, To shew my kindly worthinesse and ure, For in my time the blastes of the wind Abateth leaves, and sheddeth their verdure Wherefore every prudent creature Ought for to live right as they should dy. For all things in me taketh end naturally.

December.

December every man doth me call, In whose time the mother inviolate Delivered was in an old Oxe stall, Of Iesu Christ Gods own Son incarnate, Wherefore I think me the most fortunate Of all the other, to whom pray we then That we may come unto his blisse, Amen.

The beginnings and ends of the four seasons of the year.

THe first Prime time that thus doth begin, From mid February unto mid May; And from mid May, Summer is entred in, To mid August; and then is Harvest day; And from that time Winter entreth alway On Saint Clements day, who so taketh heed, And mid February it faileth indeed.

[illustration]

Thus endeth the praise of the xii. months, with the beginnings and endings of the four quarters And after followeth the figure for to know in what sign the Moon is every day.

This figure is for to know in what signe the moon is every day, and the declaration is of the letters of the sign of the Kalender here∣after following.

i

ii

iii

iv

v

vi

vii

viii

ix

x

xi

xii

xiii

xiv

xv

xvi

xvii

xviii

xix

Aries

y

n

c

v

l

{us}

s

h

z

p

e

u

m

a

s

i

&

q

f

Aries

z

o

d

u

m

a

s

i

&

q

f

x

n

b

t

k

{us}

r

g

Aries

&

p

e

x

••

b

t

k

{us}

r

g

y

o

c

v

l

a

s

h

Taurus

{us}

q

f

y

o

c

v

l

a

s

h

z

p

d

u

m

b

s

i

Taurus

a

r

g

z

p

d

u

m

b

s

i

&

q

e

x

n

c

t

k

Gemini

b

s

h

&

q

e

x

n

c

t

k

{us}

r

f

y

o

d

v

l

Gemini

c

s

i

{us}

r

f

y

o

d

v

l

a

s

g

z

p

e

u

m

Cancer

d

t

k

a

s

g

z

p

e

u

m

b

s

h

&

q

f

x

n

Cancer

e

v

l

b

s

h

&

q

f

x

n

c

t

i

{us}

r

g

y

o

Leo

f

u

m

c

t

i

{us}

r

g

y

o

d

v

k

a

s

h

z

p

Leo

g

x

n

d

v

k

a

s

h

z

p

e

u

l

b

s

i

&

q

Leo

h

y

o

e

u

l

b

s

i

&

q

f

x

m

c

t

k

{us}

r

Virgo

i

z

p

f

x

m

c

t

k

{us}

r

g

y

n

d

v

l

a

s

Virgo

k

&

q

g

y

n

d

v

l

a

s

h

z

o

e

u

m

b

s

Libra

l

{us}

r

h

z

o

e

u

m

b

s

i

&

p

f

x

n

c

t

Libra

m

a

s

i

&

p

f

x

n

c

t

k

{us}

q

g

y

o

d

v

Scorpio

n

b

s

k

{us}

q

g

y

••

d

v

l

••

r

h

z

p

e

u

Scorpio

o

c

••

l

a

r

h

z

p

••

u

m

••

s

i

&

q

f

x

Sagittarius

p

d

••

m

b

f

i

&

q

f

x

n

c

s

k

{us}

r

g

y

Sagittarius

q

••

u

n

••

••

k

{us}

••

g

y

••

d

t

l

a

s

h

z

Sagittarius

r

f

x

o

d

t

l

a

s

h

z

p

c

v

m

b

s

i

&

Capricornus

s

g

y

p

e

v

m

b

s

i

&

q

f

u

n

c

t

k

{us}

Capricornus

s

h

z

q

f

u

n

c

t

k

{us}

r

g

x

o

d

v

l

a

Aquarius

t

i

&

r

g

x

o

d

v

l

a

s

h

y

p

e

u

m

b

Aquarius

v

k

{us}

s

h

y

p

e

u

m

b

s

i

z

q

f

x

n

c

Pisces

u

l

a

s

i

z

q

f

x

n

c

t

k

&

r

g

y

o

d

Pisces

x

m

b

t

k

&

r

g

y

o

d

v

l

{us}

s

h

z

p

e

Pisces

y

n

c

v

l

{us}

s

h

z

p

e

u

m

a

s

i

&

q

f

By this figure here above, a man may know in what sign the moon is every day, and the declaration is of the A.b.c. letters that are in the ka∣lender at the ends of the lines, and be named the letters of the signs, wherefore mark well first the letter of the Kalender, on the day that yee would have, then look out the said Letter in the figure here above, in the line descending under the Golden number that runneth.

Then look at the head of the lines, whereas as is written the names of the signs, and it that beholdeth directly overthwart the figure to the said letters is it that the Moon is in that day. And like as one golden number for a year, so the said line under the golden number serveth alone for the same yeer, as in the year of his Kalender, we have xvi. for the golden num∣ber▪ the line under xvi. serveth all the said year, and when we have xvii. the line under xvii shall serve to the yeer that xvii. is for the golden num∣ber, and so forth of the other.

VT coelum signis praesurgens est duodenis, Sic hominis corpus assimulatur eis, Nam caput & facies, Aries sibi gaudet habere, Gutturis & colli jus tibi Taure detur, Brachia cum manibus Geminis sunt apta decenter, Naturam Cancri pectoris aula gerit: At Leo vult stomachum, renes sibi vendicat idem, Sed intestinis Virgo praeesse petit, Ambas Libra nates, ambas sibi vendicat hancas, Scorpio vult anum, vultque pudenda sibi, Inde Sagittarius is coxis vult dominari, Amborum genuum vim Capricornus habet, Regnat in Aquario cruri um vis apta decenter, Piscibus & demum congrua planta pedum.

Saturnus niger. Iupiter viridis. Mars rubeus est. Sol croceus. Venus albus. Mercurius & Luna varii sunt; dum quisquis regnat nascitur puer sic coloratus.

The declaration of the Latine here above.

THat is to say, that the twelve signs have dominion over the body of man, divided by the parts, as the signs divide the firmament, and every sign beholdeth and governeth the parts of the body, so as it is said above, and afterward shall be shewed by figures, and is declared more plainly and faithfully. Such like of Planets is said of their colours, but of their natures and prop••••ties of the parts of the bodys▪ the which gover∣neth and beholdeth, more at full shall you hear at length.

Also of the twelve months natures, March, April, and May, are very hot and moist, that signifieth blood and ayre; Iune, Iuly and August, is Summer, and signifieth hot and dry, choler, manhood, fear▪ September, October and November is harvest, and betokeneth cold and dry, and age, melancholy, and earth. December, Ianuary, and February, is winter, and betokeneth cold and moist, childhood, flegm and water.

[illustration]

CAlled I am January the cold, In Christmas season good fire I love, Yong Iesus that sometime Judas sold In me was circumcised for mans behoove; Three Kings sought the son of God above, They kneeled down, and did him homage with love, To God their Lord, that is mans own brother.

CHAP. III. Hereafter followeth a Kalender with the figures of every Saint that is hallow∣ed in the yeer, in the which is the figures, the hours, the months, and the new Moons.

Ianuary hath 31 days, the Moon 30

[illustration]

In I••no claris, calidis{que} cibis potiaris. At{que} decens potus, post sercula sit tibi notus, Laedit enim medo tunc potatus, ut bene credo. Balnea tutius intres, & venam scindere ••ures.

viii	iv	ix	A	viii	iii	••vli	Circumcisio Domini.
xvi	v	vii	b				Octa. S. Stephen.
			c	xvi	iv		Octa S. Iohannis.
v	o	ii	d	v	vii	lv	Octava sanctorum Inno.
			e				Octa sa. Thome martyr.
xi	iv	xii	f	xiii	vi		Epiphania Domini.
			g	iii	ix	xlv	Felicis and Ianua.
o	i	xxxvii	A				sa. Luciani.
x	ix	iv	b	x	viii	xli	sa. Iudi.
xviii	vi	xiii	c	xviii	iv	xvi	Pauli prim▪ he••emite.
			d				Lini Bishop. Sol in Aqua
vii	viii	vi	e	vii	o	xxxv	Archadii martyr.
			f		February.	sa. Hillary.
xv	v	xxxlv	g	x••	i	viii	Felici presbyter.
			A	iii	viii	ii	S. Maur. abbot.
iv	x	xxxi	b				sa. Marcelli Bishop.
xii	x	xli	c	xii	o	xvi	Sulp▪ Bishop.
x	xi	lii	d				sa▪ Pisce virgin.
ix	v	xi	e		x	xvii	Wolstan Bishop.
			f	ix	v	li	Fabian and Sebastian.
xvii	o	xxxiii	g	xvii	ii	xlvii	sa. Agnetis.
			A		iv	xii	Vincent martyr.
vi	vi	xxxv	b		iv	xii	sa▪ Emerancian.
			c				sa. Timothy.
••iv	ii	xvii	d				Conversion of Paul.
			e	xiv	i	xxxix	Policarp Bishop.
iii	ii	xxi	f	iii	vi	xlv	Iulian Bishop.
xi	xi	xx	g				Agneus secundo.
xix	vi	xxxv	A	xi	vii	xxxvi	Valeri. bishop and mart.
			b	xix	vi	xxvii	Batild virg.
			c				Saturnini & Victoris.

[illustration]

February hath 28. days, the Moon 27.

[illustration]

Nascitur occulta febris Februario multa, Potibus & escis, si caute vivere velis, Tunc cave frigorem, de pollice funde cruorem Fuge mellis favum pectoris qui morbos curabit.

viii	v	xii	d	••iii	i	xvi	Bridgi. & Ignasii.
xvi	o	vi	e	xvi	viii	xxxi	Purification of Mary.
			f				S. Blasi Bishop.
		xxxvii	g	v	ii	xxv	S. Gilbert Bishop.
			A	xiii	x	xxii	S. Agathe virg.
xiii	iii	lviii	b				Vedasti & Amandi.
xi	o	iv	c	ii	x	lv	sa. Anguli virg.
x	vi	lix	d	x	vii	xliv	Paul Bishop.
			e				sa. Apollony virg.
xviii	ix	ii	f	xvi	iii	iii	Sol in P••ces
			g	vii	i	liv	Eufrasie virg.
vi	i	xvi	A				sa. Eulaly.
			b	v	vii	xxxv	sa. Wolfrani.
xv	xi	xv	c				sa. Valentine Bishop.
iv	xiii	lv	d	iv	ii	xxvi	Faustin & Ioniti.
xii	o	xxxiii	e				Iulian virg.
i	vii	xli	f	xli	o	xxiii	Policron bishop & martyr▪
			g	i	viii	xxix	Simon bishop & martyr.
ix	iv	xvi	A	ix	xv	xxx	Sabin and Iulian mar.
			b	xvii	iv	lix	Mildred virg.
xvii	vi	xvi	c				Sanctorum lxix.
			d	vi	viii	lviii	Cathedra sancti Petri.
vi	i	x	e				Policarp. Locus biferti.
			f	xiv	vi	i	Mathew Apostle
xiv	iv	xii	g				Invention of S. Paul.
iii	i	xiii	A	iii	ix	xlviii	S Nestor mart.
	o	xi	b	xi	viii	liii	S, Augustin.
			c				Oswald bishop and con.

It is to be noted, that the golden numbers shew the days, hours, and minutes of the new Moons, the red numbers for the fore∣noon, and the black numbers for the afternoon, on the same day that the numbers demonstrateth.

[illustration]

March hath 31. days, the Moon 30.

[illustration]

Martius humores gignit, varios{que} dolores, Sume cibum pure, cocturas si placet ure, Balnea sunt sana, sed quae superflua vana: Vena nec addenda, nec potio sit tribuenda.

vii	viii	xxxvi	d	xix	iii	iiii	sa. David bishop.
			e	viii	o	l	sa. Cedde bishop.
			f	xv	i	xlvi	Martini et Asteri.
xvi	vi	x	g				sa. Adrian Mart.
v	x	xlviii	A	v	vii	xxxix	Foce, Eusebii, Perpetue.
			b				Victoris et Victorini.
xiii		xx	c	xiii	o	xii	Perpetue et Felic.
ii	ix	xix	d	ii	ix	xlvi	Depositio sancti Felicis.
			e				Quadraginta mart.
x	iiii	xlviii	f	x	v	xx	sa. Agapite virg.
xviii	o	xli	g	xviii	ii	xlvi	Sol in Aries. Equinoct.
			A				S. George bishop.
vii	vi	xlv	b	viii	v	i	Theodore mart.
			c	xv
xv	ii	xii	d	iiii	i	xxxiv	sa. Longin mart.
iv	i	xlii	e	xii	xviii	33	Aprilis. Boniface bishop.
xii	ix	xxxv	f		x	33	Patricii bishop.
			g				Edwardi regis.
i	v	lii	A	ix	v	xxx	Ioseph. sponsi Mary.
ix	v	vii	b		o	liii	sa. Cuthbert.
			c	xvii			Benedict abbot.
xvii	xi	xlv	d		viii	iii	Affrodici bishop.
			e	vi	i		Theodore presbyter.
vi	vi	iiii	f			lvii	Agapite mart.
			g	xiiii			Annunciatio Dominica.
iiii	iiii	vi	A	iii	ix	xlvii	Castoris Martyris.
••ii	iii	xlviii	b			xlix	Resurrectio Domini••••
••i••	v	xxxvii	c	xi	v		Dorothe virg.
••ix	vii	xlix	d	xix		xxxv	Quintin mart.
			e	viii		xlv	sa. Quirine mart.
vii	o	xv	f		o	xl	Adelme bishop.

[illustration]

Aprill hath 30. days, the Moon 29.

[illustration]

Hic probat in vere, vires Aprilis habere, Cuncta nascuntur, pori nun caperiuntur, In quo scalpescit, corpus sanguis quoque crescit Ergo salvatur venter{que} cruor, minuatur.

		g				sa. Gildardi.
	••••	A	xvi	vi	xlvii	Mary Egyptiace.
		b				Richard Bish.
o	xx	c	v	i	xliii	Ambrose Bish.
x	li	d	xiii	x	lv	sa. Martin▪
		e				Sixte Bishop.
x	lviii	f	ii	vi	xlix	Gereonis & Victoris.
ii	lix	g	••	l	xlii	sa Ruffi.
		A				sa. Augustini.
iii	xliii	b	••vii	iii	xi	Decollatio Iohannis bap.
		c	vi	vii	xix	Felicis & Audaci.
xi	xxxi	d	So•• in Tau.	Cuthburg virg.
ii	li	e				Michael in monte.
xi	34	f	••••	v	x	May
		g	••••	vii	xlvi	Translatio Etheldred.
vi	xxii			vi	xlv	Octava sancti Laurent.
iiii	xxxvi	b	i	i	xlvi	sa. Magni mart.
		c	••x	i	xxx	Lodovici Bishop.
vi	xx	d				sa. Agapite.
		e	xv••i	vi	xxxix	sa. Bernard.
iii	liiii	f				Octava assump. Mary.
		g	vi	vi	vii	Vigilia.
viii	xxx	A				Lodovici Regis.
xi	xxxix	b	xliii	ix	xxxvi	sa. Severini.
xviii	xxxii	c	ii	x	xi	Mark Evangelist.
		d				Cleti Bishop and Confes.
ii	o	e	vi	ii	xxx	sa. Anastasti Bishop.
ix	o	f	xix	xi	li	Sep. Vigilia.
		g				Assumptio be••••e Mary.
iii	lvi	A	vii	ii	xxii	sa. Rochi.

[illustration]

May hath 31. days, the Moon 30.

[illustration]

Maio secure laxiti sit tibi curae, Scindatur vena, sed potio datur amaena, Cum calidis rebus, sunt fercula seu speciebus, Potibus abstructa sit salvia cum bened••cta.

viii	iii	lvi	b		viii		Philip and Iacob.
vi	xi	xiii	c	xvi	iii	xxxv	sa. Anastasi Bishop.
v	ix	xli	d			xvii	Inventio sancti crucis.
			e				Festum corone spinee.
xiiii	vi	xxi	f	xiii	vi	xx	sa. Godard.
ii		xvi	g	ii		xxxiiii	Iohannis ante port. lat.
			A	x		xxx	Iohn de Beverlaco.
x	i	xvii	b				Apparitio Michaelis.
			c	xvii	iii	xli	Translatio Nicholai.
xviii	vii	xxi	d				Gordian & Epimachi.
vii		xxxiiii	e		x	xxx	sa. Anthon. mar.
xv	vi	xix	f		xvi		Nerei, Archilei & Pancra.
			g	xv	xviii	xii	Sol in Gemini.
	vii	viii	A	iiii	i	ix	Boniface mar.
	iii	xxiii	b	xij	ix	lvii	Isidore mar.
			c	i		lix	Brandin bish. and Confessor.
i	iiii	xi	d		viii		Translation of Bernard.
xx	viii	xxxiii	e	x		i	Diascor. mar.
			f				S. Dunston.
			g	vii	ii	xli	s. Bernard.
xvii	vii	ii	A		xx		Helen. regine.
xi	viii	xx	b	vi		ix	Iulian virg.
			c		vi		Desider. mar.
xiiii	vi	xlvi	d	xiiii	ii	i	Trans. Francisci.
iii	i	xlix	e	iii	x	xl	sa. Adelme.
xi	x	xliiii	f	ix		xliii	Augustine Anglorum Apost.
xx	xi	xx	g				Bede presbyter.
			A	xix		lix	S. German.
vii	vii	iiii	b		ii		Coronis Martyr.
xvi	ix	xlv	c	viii	o	liiii	s. Felicis Bishop.
			d	vi		xli	sa. Petronille virg.

[illustration]

Iune hath 30 days the Moon 29.

[illustration]

In Iunio Gentes, perturbat medo bibentes, Atque novellarum fuste potus serviciarum, Ne noceat colera, valet refectio vita, Lactucae frondes ede, je junus bibe fontes.

v	vii	v	e	v	iii	xii	Sancti Nichomedis.
xiii	i	liii	f	xvi	ii	xviii	Sancti Marcellini.
xi	xii	ii	g	ii	x	xv	s. Erasmi martyris.
			A				sancti Petrocii.
x	i	xliiii	b	x	v	lv	s. Boniface Bishop.
			c				Melonis Archbishop.
xviii	xi	v	d	xviii	vi	xxv	Translatio Wulstan.
			e				Sancti Wilhelmi.
vii	iii	xlix	f	vii	i		Trans. of Edmundi.
xv	v	ix	g	xv	xvii	ix	Translatio sanc. Iuonis.
iiii	i	xlix	A	iiii	xxvi	xlii	Barnabe Apostle.
			b	xii	xi	xiiii	S. Basil.
xii	i	i	c			Iuli	Sol in Cancer solsticium.
i	iiii		d	i	vii	iii	S. Basil Bishop.
		lviii	e	ix	viii	xxiii	Vic & modesti.
ix	x		f				Trans. of Richard.
			g				S. Botolph.
xvii	vi		A	xvii	v	xxx	Marci and Marcellina.
		xii	b			xxiii	Gervasi & prothasi.
vi	v		c				Trans. of Edward.
xiiii	i	liii	d	xiiii	ix	xvii	Walburge Virgin.
iii	ix	xviii	e		ix	xviii	s. Alban. Martyr.
xi	viii	xxxvi	f	iii			Etheldred Vigilia.
		xxxv	g		viii	xiii	Nat. of S. Iohn Baptist.
xix	lii		A	xi		xxviii	Trans. of Eligi Bishop.
		vii	b	xi	x		Iohn and Paul.
viii	ix		c	viii		xv	S. Cressent martyr.
		xxi	d		x		sa. Leon Bishop.
			e				Peter and Paul Apostles.
xvi	vi	xv	f	xvi	i	ii	Commemoration of Paul

[illustration]

Iuly hath 31 days the Moon 30

[illustration]

Qui vult solamer, Julio hic probat medicamen. Venam non scindat, ne ventrem potio ledat, Somnum cupescat▪ & bal••ea cuncta pavescat, Prodest recens unda, alvum cum salvia munda.

v	iix	ix	g	v	i	v	Octa. Iohn Baptist.
xiii	x	xxix	A	xiii	viii	lvii	Visitatio beate Marie.
			b				Translatio Thome Ap.
ii	x	lix	c	ii	iiii	liiii	Translatio sancti Mar.
			d	x	iiii	xxxix	sa. Zoe virg.
x	iii	vi	e				Octava Peter & Paul.
			f				Translatio Thom. mar
xviii	o	xlviii	g	xviii	ix	xxxi	Depositio Grimbald.
vii	v	vii	A	••ii	iii	lii	sa. Cerill Bishop.
xv	l	xlv	b				Septem fratrum mar.
iiii	viii	xlvi	c	xv		xlvi	Translatio Benedici.
			d	iiii	ix	xxxix	Naboris & Felicis.
xii	i	li	e	xii	vi	xxxix	sa. privati martyr.
			f	i	v	l	Sol in Leo Dles Canic.
i	vii	v	g				Translatio Swithin.
			A	ix	ix	xlii	August trans. Osmund.
ix	i	xlix	b				sa. Kenelmi regis.
			c	xvii	vii	xxx	sa. Arnulph Bishop.
xviii	viii	xliii	d				Rufini & Iustini.
vi	••i	x	e	vi	x	xi	Margaret Virgin.
xiiii	iiii	lvii	f	xiiii	ix	xxi	Praxedis virg.
			g			xxii	Mary Magdalen.
iiii	vii	o	A	iii	iv	xix	sa. Apollinatis.
xi	viii	xl	b	xi	o	lvii	Christin virg. Vigilia.
		iii	c				S. Iacob Apostle▪
xix	vii		d	xix	ix	xlx	Anne mother of Mary.
viii	x	xliiii	e				septem dormientium.
			f	viii	xliii		Sampson Byshop.
xvi	ii	xii	g	xvi	xi	lix	Felicis & sociorum eius.
v	ix	vii	A	v	ix	lii	Abdon and senins.
			b				sa. Germani.

[illustration]

August hath 31. days, the Moon 30.

[illustration]

Quisquis sub Augusto, vivat medicamine justo, Raro dormiat, & aestum coi••••m quoque vitet, Balnea non curet, nec multum comestio duret, Nemo laxari debet, vel phlebothomari.

xiii	ix	o	c	xiii	iiii	xxx	Petri ad vincula.
			d	ii	iii	xvii	Stephani Bish.
ii	x	v	e	x	iiii	xxx	Inventio san. Stephani.
x	vi	ii	f				Iustini Presbyteri.
			g				Oswaldi. Festum nivis.
xviii	xiii	xxx	A	xiii	o	xlv	Transfiguratio Domini.
vii	xxiiii	xvi	b				Festum nominis Iesu.
xv	viii	lviii	c	vii	v	xliii	sa. Ciriac.
			d	xv	ix	liii	Vigilia.
iiii	v	v	e	iiii	xv	lxiii	sa Laurentii.
xi			f	xii	iiii	xi	Tiburtii mar.
••	iiii	ii	g				Clare virg.
	x	xxxvi	A		vi	lix	Hypolite & sociorum eius.
ix			b		xii	xlviii	Sep. Vigilia.
	iii	lvi	c				Assumptio beat. Mary.
xvii			d	Sol in Virg.	sa. Rochi.
vi	ii	xi	e	xviii	viii	iii	Octava sanct. Laurent.
	x	viii	f	vi	viii	lii	sa. Magni mart.
			g				Lodovici Bishop.
xiiii	vi	xvi	A	xiiii	iiii	xlv	sa. Agapite.
	vi	li	b	xiii	o	xlix	sa. Bernard.
xi			c				Octava assum. Mary.
xix	viii	xvii	d	xi	v	ii	Vigilia.
	viii	l	e				Bartholomew Apost.
viii			f	xix	v	xii	Lodovici Regis.
xvi	xi	lxvi	g	viii	x	lix	sa. Severini.
	ix	lviii	A	xvi	ix	lix	sa. Ruffi.
v			b				sa. Augustini.
xiii	v	iii	c	v	v	lviii	Decollatio Iohannis bap.
	x	xi	d		i	lix	Felicis & Audaci.
			e				Cuthburg. virg.

[illustration]

September hath 30▪ days the Moon

[illustration]

Fructus maturi, Septembris sunt valituri, Et pira cum vino, panis cum lacte caprino. Aqua de urtica, tibi poto fertur amica Tunc venam pandas, species cum semine mandas

ii	ii	xxxiii	f	ii	ix	xiiii	S. Egidii.
			g	x	vi		sa. Anthonii.
x	x	xx	A			x	Ordinatio sa. Greg.
			b	xviii	iiii		Translatio sant. Cuth.
xviii	i	xviii	c	vii	vi	vii	sa. Bertini.
vii	x	xlvi	d			l	sa. Eugen••i.
xv	v	x	e	xv	vi
iiii	iii	xlix	f	iii	i	xxvi	Nativitas Mary.
			g	xiii	v	o	sa. Gorgonii.
xii	viii	xi	A	i	x	xxxv	Silvii Bishop.
			b			xliii	Prothi & Iacinti.
••	iii	v	c	ii	v	xxxii	Martiniani Bishop.
			d		October.	Maurelii Bishop.
ix	vii	li	e	xvii	ix	vii	Exaltatio s. ••ru. Sol in Li.
xvii	xi	xvii	f				Octa. beate Mary.
			g	vi	vi	xliii	Edithe virgin.
v••	vi	xv	A	xiii	i	xliii	Lambert bishop and mart.
xiiii	vi	xviii	b				Victoris & Corone.
			c	iii	xi	xxxix	Ianuarii mart.
iii	ix	xxxi	d				sa. Eustachii virg.
xi		xxxix	e	xi	iii	xli	Saint Marth••i Apostoli.
			f	xix	x	xx	Mauricii et sociorum eius.
xi	xi	viii	g				Tecle Virgin.
vi	x	lvi	A	xviii	iii	xix	Andochii Martyr.
			b	xvi	vii	38	Firmini Bishop and mart.
xvi	vi	xxxvii	c	v	ii	xxxii	Cyprian. & Iustini.
v	ii	iiii	d				Cosme & Damiani.
			e	xiii	ii	ix	Exuperii Bishop.
xiii	ii	x	f	ii	v	x	S. Michael Archangel.
			g				Hieronimi presbyter.

[illustration]

October hath 31. days, the Moon 30.

[illustration]

October vina praebet cum carne ferina, Nec non aucina caro valet & volucrina. Quamvis sint sana, tunc est repletio vana. Quantum vis comede, sed non praecordia laede

••	vii	lii	A			viii	S. Remigy.
			b				S. Leodigary.
••	xiii	xv	c				Candidi mart.
xviii	o	xix	d	xxii			Francis Confessor.
vii	xx	iii	e				Apollinarii martyr.
xv	iiii	xxxvi	f	vii	vi	vi	sa. Fidis.
			g	xv	iii	o	Marci & Marcellian.
••i	v	xxii	••	iii			sa. Pelagy.
		vii	b	xii	ix	xlvii	Dionysi & Rustic.
xii	ii		c				Gereonis & Victoris.
		xli	d	i	iiii	xxxvi	Sancti Nigasii.
••	vii	i	e				Sancti Wilfredi.
••••	x		f	ix	v	lvi	Translatio sancti Ed.
		xxxiii	g	Sol in Scor.	Sancti Calixte epis.
xvii	viii	xlix	A	xviii	viii	xli	Wulfrani episcopi.
vi	iii		b	vi	iii	xxxv	Nove. Michael in mon.
			c	xiiii	o	liii	Translatio Etheldred.
xiiii	ix	xx	d				Luke Evangelist.
		xlv	e	ii	i	xxv	Fredeswide virginis.
iii	ii	li	f				Austreberte virginis.
xi	ix	xxxi	g		x	xxxvi	xi. M. virginum.
xix	o		A				Mary Salmone.
		lii	b	xix	iii	38	Sancti Romani.
viii	ix	lii	c	viii	xviii	xiv	Sancti Magloric.
••vi	iiii		d	xvi	v	x	Cripini & Trispiniani.
			e	v	••	xvi	Euaristi episcopi.
••	iii	xvi	f				Florentii mar. Vigilia.
		xx	g	viii	v	xx	Simon and Iude.
••••ii	vii		A				Germane Capuani
		vii	b				Marcissi Bishop
••	iii		c				Sanct. Quintini vigil.

[illustration]

November hath 30. days, the Moon 29.

[illustration]

Hoc tibi scire datur, quod reuma Novembre creatur, Quae{que} nociva vita tua sint preciosa die••a, Balnea cum Venere tunc nullum constat habere. Potio sit sana, valde atque minuta bona.

x	vii	xlvii	d	xi	v	xii	Feast of all Saints.
			e				Commemora. animar.
xviii	x	xlviii	f	xviii	viii	lii	Wenefred virgin.
vii	v	xliv	g	vii	vi	xxviii	s. Amantii.
xv	vi	xxi	A				Leti presbyteri.
••v		lv	b	xv	i	xxxvi	Leonard abbot.
			c	iv		xv	Wilbrod Bishop
			d	xii	ix		Quatuor coronatorum.
xix	viii	vi	e		xvii	v	Theodore martyr.
i	x	xxv	f	December	s. Martin Bishop.
			g		i	xxix	saint Martin.
xi	x	lix	A	ix	ii	••xxix	Patern martyr.
xvii	vi	xxx	b	xvii			s. Brici Bishop.
			c		vi	ii	Trans. Erkin. Sol in sag
vi	iii	ii	d	vi			sa. Macuti bishop
			e	••v	iv	xiv	sa. Edmund Arch-bishop.
xiv	iii	iii	f				sa. Hugonis Bishop.
iii	ix	lvi	g	iii	vii	xlvii	Octav. s. mart.
			A		vii	xxxv	sa. Elizabeth.
vi	v		b	xi	iii	xvi	s. Edmund Regis.
xix		xxviii	c		xi	xxxviii	Presentatio martyr.
vii	viii		d	xix			Cicely virg
		xvii	e	viii	xi	vi	sa. Clement bishop.
xvi			f	xvi			sa. Grigosoni.
v	vi	xiii	g	v	xi	liv	Katherine virg.
		xlvii	A			xxi	Lini bishop.
			b	xii	v		Agricole & vitalis.
xiii	vii		c		o		Rufi mart.
iii		xxx	d	ii			Saturn & Sisini.
x	x	lii	e	x			S. Andrew Apostle.

[illustration]

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

December hath 31. days, the Moon 30.

[illustration]

Sanae sunt membris, calidae res mense Decembris. Frigus vitetur, capitalis vena scindatur: Lotio si•• vana, sed vasis potio cara, Sit tepidus potus, frigori contrarie totus.

x	x	lv	f	x	xxi	o	sa. Eligi Bishop.
xvi••	viii	xlvi	g	xvi	iix	xvi	sa. Lybian.
vii	v	xvi	A				Depositio Osmu.
xv		x	b	vii	v	viii	sa. Barbare.
			c	xv	i	xliv	Sabba Abbot.
••v	iv	xxxiv	d				Nicholas bishop and Con.
			e	iv	ii	xxxvi	Octava Andrew Apostle.
			f	xii	xi	xxxiv	Conception of Mary.
xii	o	xvi	g▪				Cyprian abbot.
i	ix	xxviii	A	i	v	vi	sa Eulalie.
ix	x	xxvi	b	ix	vii	vii	sa. Damasce Pope.
			c		Sol in Cay.	Paul bishop. Solstitium.
xvii	v	xli	d	xvii	v	xlvi	Lucy Virgin.
vi	iv	xx	e	vi	i	ii	Ianuari.
xiv		liv	f				Valeri bishop.
			g	xiv	vi	xlviii	O sapientia.
			A				sa. Lazari bishop.
iv	iv	liv	b	iii	o	xl	sa. Gratian.
xi	ix	xxi	c				sa. Venesie virg.
xix	xi	xxxiii	d	xi	vi	xxxix	Iuli Martyr vigilia.
			e	xix	x	v	Thom. Apostle
viii	vi	xxxi	f	viii	xlx	xxii	Triginta martyr.
xvi	vii	liii	g	xvi	ii	xxiv	Victory virg.
			A				Sanctarum virginum.
v	xi	xlix	b	••v	o	lvii	Nativity of our Lord▪
			c				sa Stephen.
xiii	x	o	d	xiii	vi	xxii	sa. Iohn.
			e				sa. Innocents▪
ii	o	liv	f	ii	i	viii	sa. Tho. martyr.
			g	x	v	xl	Trans. of Iacob.
	o	vi	A				saint Silvester.

[illustration]

Letter Dominicall.	Letter tabular.	The exposition, valour, and signification of the letters of the tabular figure, that be in the second line after the Dominical letter.
	Moveable feasts				Intervals
Septu∣gessime.	Easter in	Roga∣cion. s.	Whitsun∣day in	Frō Christ∣mas to Lent.	Frō Whitsun∣day to saint Iohn.	Frō Whit∣sunday to advent.
Ianuary, March, Aprill May, Week, day, Week, day,
d	b	xviii	xxiii	xxvi	x	v	5	6	3	29	Friday.
e	c	xix	xxiv	xxvii	xi	v	6	6	2	29	Thursday.
f	d	xx	xxv	xxviii	xii	v	5	6	1	29	Wednesday.
g	e	xxi	xxvi	xxix	xiii	vi	1	6		29	Tuesday.
A	f	xxii	xxvii	xxx	xiv	vi	2	5	6	29	Monday.
b	g	xxiii	xxviii	May	xv	vi	3	5	5	29	Sunday.
c	h	xxiv	xxix	ii	xvi	vi	4	5	4	28	Saturday.
d	i	xxv	xxx	iii	xvii	vi	5	5	3	28	Friday.
e	k	xxvi	xxxi	iv	xviii	vi	6	5	2	28	Thursday.
••	l	xxvii	Aprill	v	xix	vi	5	5	1	28	Wednesday.
g	m	xxviii	ii	vi	xx	vii	1	5		28	Tuesday.
A	n	xxix	iii	vii	xxi	vii	2	4	6	27	Monday.
b	o	xxx	iv	viii	xxii	vii	3	4	5	27	Sunday.
c	p	xxxi	v	ix	xxiii	vii	4	4	4	27	Saturday.
d	q	February	vi	x	xiv	vii	5	4	3	27	Friday.
e	r	ii	vii	xi	xxv	vii	6	4	2	27	Thursday.
f	s	iii	viii	xii	xxvi	vii		4	1	27	Wednesday.
g	t	iv	ix	xiii	xxvii	viii	1	4		27	Tuesday.
A	u	v	x	xiv	xxviii	viii	2	3	6	27	Monday.
b	a	vi	xi	xv	xxix	viii		3	5	26	Sunday.
c	b	vii	xii	xvi	xxx	viii	4	3	4	26	Saturday.
d	c	viii	xiii	xvii	xxxi	viii	5	3	3	26	Friday.
e	d	ix	xiv	xviii	Iune	viii	6	3	26	Thursday.
f	e	x	xv	xix	ii	viii		3	1	26	Wednesday.
g	f	xi	xvi	xx	iii	ix	1			26	Tuesday.
A	g	xi	xvii	xxi	iv	ix	2	2	6	25	Monday.
b	h	xiii	xviii	xxii	v	ix	3	2	5	25	Sunday.
e	i	xiv	xix	xxiii	vi	ix	4	2	4	25	Saturday.
d	k	xv	xx	xxiv	vii	ix	5	2	3	25	Friday.
e	l	xvi	xvi	xxv	viii	ix	6	2	2	25	Thursday.
f	m	xvii	xxii	xx••i	ix	ix		2	1	25	Wednesday.
g	n	xviii	xxiii	xxvii	x	x	1			25	Tuesday.
A	o	xix	xxiv	xxviii	xi	x	2	1	6	25	Monday.
b	p	xx	xxv	xxix	xii	x	3	1	5	25	Sunday.
c	q	xxi		xxx	xiii	x	4	1	4	25	Saturday.
d	r	xxii		xxxi

The figure of the letter tabular, which is declared by the two present figures, the first for the black letters, the second for the red letters.

b

b

c

b

bd

i

ii

iii

iv

v

vi

vii

viii

ix

x

xi

xii

xiii

xiv

xv

xvi

xvii

xviii

xix

s

k

i

o

f

f

p

o

b

o

n

s

k

k

o

f

f

l

o

k

g

s

c

o

r

m

t

i

l

••

g

g

t

c

••

p

p

t

l

l

q

g

g

m

q

c

h

h

••

l

d

b

g

g

m

m

r

h

h

v

e

d

q

n

a

n

m

r

f

h

n

e

••

q

i

a

f

e

r

i

b

n

k

e

k

i

a

f

••

r

b

b

o

n

s

k

k

o

f

f

k

••

b

••

g

s

k

k

p

f

••

l

l

o

g

g

t

c

o

p

m

o

l

l

q

g

g

t

d

••

p

p

v

l

l

q

h

g

m

n

e

h

h

••

e

d

q

h

a

m

m

r

i

i

v

e

e

q

••

a

n

m

r

i

••

n

e

e

k

t

a

f

••

r

i

b

n

l

e

k

k

••

f

i

s

b

b

o

••

s

k

k

p

f

f

l

••

b

o

g

••

k

k

p

g

e

l

l

o

g

g

c

d

e

p

m

v

l

q

h

h

t

d

d

p

p

o

m

l

q

h

h

m

q

d

n

d

e

e

q

h

a

n

m

a

i

••

v

e

c

q

o

n

n

n

r

i

i

o

e

e

k

k

a

f

f

s

i

b

o

l

e

k

k

v

f

f

s

c

b

o

o

t

k

k

k

g

f

l

p

c

••

g

t

l

l

p

g

g

i

i

o

g

g

t

d

d

p

••

v

m

l

q

h

h

t

b

d

q

p

v

m

l

b

h

h

n

r

d

i

i

v

e

e

r

d

a

n

••

r

i

f

o

e

••

r

o

a

n

n

s

i

i

o

f

e

k

k

o

f

f

s

c

d

o

o

t

••

k

b

g

f

s

c

••

o

a

t

l

k

p

g

g

l

l

e

••

g

t

l

o

p

g

g

m

i

c

h

h

t

d

d

q

q

v

m

m

q

h

••

n

d

o

q

s

v

m

e

c

h

b

n

n

o

f

i

a

e

e

r

b

a

n

n

s

i

i

r

f

e

r

r

b

n

n

s

k

i

o

f

f

k

b

o

g

t

o

c

••

o

o

o

l

k

g

g

s

c

e

p

o

t

l

s

g

g

m

m

c

b

h

t

l

d

q

g

h

m

m

c

h

h

p

d

d

q

q

v

m

m

r

p

••

n

e

d

b

l

••

m

e

v

i

h

n

n

e

i

i

a

f

e

r

b

b

n

n

This present figure is to find the letter tabular, and proceedeth as the figure followeth of the Dominicall letters, and it is behovefull to know the Golden number for the yeer that ye will know, and in the line that descendeth downward under the said number is the letter tabular: even so of the Dominicall Letter in the figure hereafter. And you must know that a Golden number, Dominicall letter, and a letter tabular serveth al∣ways for a year, save when it is bissext that been two dominicall letters, & also two tabular letters as above. It ought to be known that the Domi∣nicall letters and the letters tabular, be in the first line under the Golden number xvi. for the yeer of this present Kalender, that is M.CCCC.xcvii. and so of the other.

The figure for to find the golden number and the letter Dominicall together for evermore.

b

b

c

b

d

b

••

ii

iii

iv

v

vi

vii

viii

ix

x

xi

xii

xiii

xiv

xv

xvi

xvii

xviii

xix.

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

d

r

cb

a

g

f

de

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

va

g

f

••

d••

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

••d

••b

a

gf

e

••

c

••a

g

••

e

d••

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

••b

a

g

••

ed

e

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

e

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

cd

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

••

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

d

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

••b

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

••

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

••

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

d

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c••

b

ag

f

e

b

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

fg

e

d

e

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

b

ag

f

e

d

cb

a

g

e

dc

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

f

e

dc

b

a

g

fe

d

c

e

ag

f

e

d

cd

a

g

f

ed

c

b

a

gf

e

d

c

ba

g

In this present figure it behoveth to behold the golden number of the yeer that ye will know, and in the line right under the golden number al∣ways is the letter dominicall, c▪ upon the golden number, viii. high Easter, and when it falleth that they come both together, Corpus Christi, & Saint Iohns day be all in one day, d▪ upon xvi. signifieth the lowest Easter. And when it falleth that Candelmas and shrove monday commeth together. b signifieth all about where it is when it falleth with the golden number, upon the which is our Lady day in March on good Fryday.

CHAP. V. A Figure perpetuall for Easter, and other moveable Feasts.

	i		ii		iii		iv		v
A	a x	A	m xxvi	A	a xvi	A	a ix	A	m xxvi
b	a x	b	m xxvij	b	a xvij	b	a iij	b	m xxvii
c	a xi	c	m xxviij	c	a xviij	c	a iv	c	m xxviii
d	a xii	d	m xxix	d	a xix	d	a v	d	m xxix
e	a vi	e	m xxx	e	a xx	e	a v	e	m xxiii
f	a vii	f	m xxxi	f	a xxiv	f	a vij	f	m xxiv
g	a vii	g	m i	g	â xxv	g	a viij	g	m xxv
	vi		vij		viij		ix		x
A	a xvi	A	a ij	A	a xxiv	A	a ix	A	a ij
b	a xvii	b	a iij	b	a xxiv	b	a x	b	a iij
c	a xviii	c	a iv	c	a xxv	c	a xi	c	m xxviii
d	a vii	d	a v	d	a xix	d	a xii	d	m xxix
e	a xiii	e	a vi	e	a xx	e	a xiij	e	m xxx
f	a xiiii	f	m xxxi	f	a xx	f	xiv	f	m xxxi
g	a xv	g	a i	g	a xxij	g	a viii	g	ai
	xi		xij		xiij		xiv		xv
A	a xvi	A	a ix	A	a xxvi	A	a xvi	A	a ij
b	a xvii	b	a x	b	m 27	b	a xvii	b	a iij
c	a xviii	c	a xi	c	m 28	c	a xviii	c	a iv
d	a xix	d	a v	d	m 29	d	a xix	d	a v
e	a xx	e	a vi	e	m 30	e	a xiij	e	a vi
f	a xxi	f	a vij	f	m xxi	f	a xiv	f	a vij
g	a xxii	g	a viij	g	m xxv	g	a xv	g	a viij
	xvi		xvij		xviiii		xix
A	m xxv	A	a xvi	A	a ij	A	a xiij
b	m xxviii	b	a x	b	a iij	b	a xiv
c	m xxviii	c	a xi	c	a vi	c	a xviij
d	m xxii	d	a xii	d	a v	d	a xix
e	m xxiii	e	a xiij	e	m 30	e	a xx
f	m xxiv	f	a xiv	f	m 31	f	a xxi
g	•• xx••v	g	a xv	g	a i	g	a xxij

Vpon the letter Dominicall next under the golden number, that run∣neth is Easter day, for the year of the golden number, a signifieth April, insignifieth March, and the number of the said Letters is the number of the days of the month that Easter shall fall upon.

CHAP. VI. The figure of the Eclipse of the Sunne and the Moon, the days hours, and moments.

M.d.lxxii. the Eclipse of the moon the 17. day of october, xiii hours, lxii. minutes. M.d.lxix. the Eclipse of the Moon the se∣cond day of March, xx. hours. 4. min. M.d.lxx. the Eclipse of the moon the 20. day of february v. hours, 39. minutes. M.d.lxx. the Eclipse of the moon the xv. day of August, ix▪ hours xvii. minutes.

[illustration]

M.d.lxxii. the Eclipse of the moon the xv. day of Iune, ix. hours▪ lxii. mi∣nutes. M.d.lxxiii. the Eclipse of the moon the viii. day of Decem. 7. hours, 38. minutes. M d.lxxiiii. the Eclipse of the sunne the xiii. day of novem∣ber, iii. hours, 52. minutes. M.d.lxxvi. the Eclipse of the sun the 7. day of October, x. hours, lii. mi∣nutes.

[illustration]

M.d.lxxvii. the Eclipse of the moon the 2. day of Aprill, 8. hours, xviii. minutes. M.d. 78. the Eclipse of the moon the 26. day of septem∣ber, xii. hours, 36 minutes. M.d.lxxviii. the Eclipse of the moon the 15. day of sep∣temb. 13 hours viii minutes. M.d.lxxx. the Eclipse of the moon the 31. day of Ianua∣ry, x. hours, vi. minutes.

[illustration]

M.d.lxxxi. the Eclipse of the moon the 19. day of Ianuary, 11. hours 6. mi∣nutes. M.d.lxxxii. the Eclipse of the Moon the 15. day of Iuly, xvi hours, 48 minutes. M.d.lxxxiii. the Eclipse of the sunne the 19. day of Iune, 16. hours, 53. minutes. M.d.lxxxiiii. the Eclipse of the sun the xix day of Aprill xvii hours, xxvii minutes.

[illustration]

M.d.lxxxv. the Eclipse of the moon the viii. day of No∣vember, xiii. hours xii. min. M.d.lxxxvi. the Eclipse of the moon the xvi. day of septem∣ber, 8. hours, lviii minutes. M d.lxxxvii. the Eclipse of the moon the second day of March 15. hours xiv. mi. M.d.lxxxviii. the Eclipse of the moon the 25. day of Au∣gust xvii hours xxiii. minutes.

[illustration]

M.d.lxxxix. the Eclipse of the moon, the 15. day of August, 7. hours 53. minutes. M.d.xc. the Eclipse of the Sunne the 20. day of Iuly, 19 hours, 38. mi∣nutes. M.d.xc. the Eclipse of the moon the xxx day of decemb. 8. hours i. mi∣nute. M.d.xci. the Eclipse of the Sun the 10. day of Iuly 36. hours, 36 minutes.

[illustration]

M v c.xc the Eclipse of the moon the xix. day of decem∣ber, xvii hours xxiv minutes. M v c.xci. the Eclipse of the moon the xiii. day of Iune, x hours xxiiii. minutes: M.v c.xcii. the Eclipse of the moon, the 8. day of decem∣ber, viii. hours xxiii minutes, M v.c.xciii. the Eclipse of the sun the .xx. day of May, two hours xxxvi m.

[illustration]

M.v.cxciiii the Eclipse of the moon the viii. day of oc∣tob. xix hours 28. minutes. M v c xcv the Eclipse of the moon the xiii. day of Aprill▪ xvi. hours liii. minutes. M v c.xcv the Eclispe of the Sun▪ the xxiii. of September the i hour, xiii. minutes. M v.c.xcvi. the Eclipse of the moon, the ii day of April, ix. hours, xlix minutes.

[illustration]

M.v.c.xcvii. the Eclipse of the moon the x. day of fe∣bruary, 18. hours 57. min. M.v.c.xcviii. the Eclipse of the sun, the 24 day of Febru∣ary, 12. hours 11. minutes. M.v.c.xcviii. the Eclipse of the moon, the vi. of August, vii. hours, lviii minutes. M.v.c.cxix. the Eclipse of the moon the 30. day of Ianua∣ry, 19. hours, 6 minutes.

[illustration]

M vi.c the Eclipse of the sun, the 30. day of Iune, one hour, xxxiii. minutes. M.vi.c.i. the Eclipse of the moon the 29. day of novem. vii. hours, 38. minutes. M.vi c.i. the Eclipse of the Sunne the 14. day of Decem. ii hours, liiii. minutes. M.vi c.ii. the Eclipse of the moon the xxv. of May, vii. hours xxxvi. minutes.

[illustration]

M vi.c.iii. the Eclipse of the moon the xiiii. day of May, xii. hours l. minutes. M vi c. iii. the Eclipse of the moon▪ the viii. day of novem∣ber, vii. hours 37. minutes. M.vi c.iv. the Eclipse of the moon, the 24. day of March the ix. hours, 42. minutes. M.vi c.v. the Eclipse of the moon, the 24. day of March, at viii a clock at night.

[illustration]

M.vi.c.v. the Eclipse of the moon the 17. day of septem. a quarter past 4. in the morn. M.vi.c.v the Eclipse of the sun, the 2. day of Octob. half an hour past one a clock. M.vi.c.vi. ther is no Eclipse to be seen. M.vi.c.vii. the Eclipse of the moon the 27. day of August, half an hour past 2 in them.

[illustration]

M.vi.c viii the Eclipse of the sun the 3••. day of Iuly▪ a quarter past 3. a clock. M.vi.c.xi. the Eclipse of the Moon the 10. day of Ianua∣ry, a quar. fore 2, in the morn. M.vi.c.ix. the Eclipse of the moon the 6. day of Iuly, a quarter past xi at night. M.vi.c.x. the Eclipse of the moon the xxvi of Iuly, at 4. a clock in the morning.

[illustration]

M.vi.c. 10. the Eclipse of the moon the 20. day of Decem. at 3. a clock in the morn. M vi.c. 11. the Eclipse of the moon the 3. of May, at sun-setting total∣ly darkned.

[illustration]

All the Eclipses of the Sun be in the day, and of the Moon by night. And yee shall with the Eclipse of the Sun and of the Moon appeareth sometime ohterwise than we see it, for the Eclipse of the Sun may well be by night and the Eclipse of the Moon may be by day, but such Eclipse appeareth not to us Shepheards.

NO marvell that mans mind is mutable, And will you know wherfore and why▪ For he is made of things variable, As of hot, cold, moist, and dry, The wit is light and passeth lightly, And sith we be made of four changeable How should man be stedfast and stable?

An Eclipse shall be marvellous to behold, Through which many shall be the worse, For many shall find neither silver nor gold, It shall be so dark within their purse.

[illustration]

Pocula Ianus amat.

Tangere crura cave quum luna videbit aquosa, Insere tunc plantas: excelsas erige turres, Et si carpis iter tunc tardius ad loca transi.

Febrius urgeo clamat.

Pisces habens lunam noli curare podagram, Carpe viam tutus, sit potio modo salubris.

Martius arva colit.

Nil capiti noceas Aries cum luna refulget, De vena minuas, & balnea tutius intres, Non tangas aures, nec barbam radere debes.

Aprilis florida prodit.

Arbor plantetur cum in luna Taurus habetur, Non minuas tamen, edifices, nec semina sparges, Et medicus caveat cum ferro tangere collum.

Ros & flos nemorum Maio sunt comes amorum.

Brachia non minuas cum lustrat luna Gemellos, Unguibus & manibus cum ferro curra negitur, Nunquam sortabis a promissore petitum.

Dat Iunius faena.

Pectus pulmo jecur in Cancro non minuantur, Somnia falsa vides utilis sit emptio rerum, Potio sumatur, securus perge viator.

Iulio resecatur avena.

Cor gravat & stomachum cum cernit Luna Leonem, Non facies vestes nec ad convivia vades, Et nil ore vomas, nec sumas tunc medicinam.

Augustus spicas.

Lunam Virgo tenens uxorem ducere noli, Viscera cum costis caveas tractare cruorem, Semen datur agro, dubites intrare carinam.

September colligit uvas.

Libra Lunam tenens nemo genitalia tangat, Aut renes, nates nec iter capere debes, Extremam partem Librae cum luna tenebit.

Seminat October.

Scorpius augmentat morbos in parte pudenda, Vulnera non cures, caveas ascendere naves, Et si carpis iter timeas de morte ruinam.

Spoliat virgulta November.

Luna nocet femori, per partes mota Sagitta, Vngues vel crines poteris pra••••cindere tutò, De vena minuas, & balnea tutius intres.

[illustration]

Quaerit habere cibum porcum mactando December.

Capra nocet genibus ipsam cum Luna tenebit, Intrat aqua novam citius curabitur aeger, Fundamenta ruunt modicum tunc durat id ipsum.

Epilogus sequitur omnium supra dictorum.

QVae viri antiqui potuerunt scribere libris, Decurrendo polum constanti mente rotundum, AEreasque domos temptando & sydera cuncta, Quae{que} fluunt ex his, quomodo nunc sol moveatur, Intus habes collecta brevi compendio & arte.

De duodecim signis.

Signorum princeps, Aries, & Taurus & Urna, Tindaride juvenes, & fervida brachia Cancri, Herculeus{que} Leo Nemeae pavor, asma{que} Virgo, Libra jugo aequaliter pendent: & scorpius acris Centaurus{que} senex Chiron, & cornua Capri, Dilectus{que} Iovi puer, & duo sidera Pisces.

Idem de signis.

Corniger in primis Aries, & corniger alter, Taurus, item Gemini: sequitur quos Cancer adustus, Terribilis{que} ferae species, & justa puella, Libra, simul nigrum portans in acumine virus, Centaurus{que} biformis adest: pelagi{que} puella, Et qui portat aquam puer urniger, & duo Pisces.

De quatuor partibus anni. De vere

Ver{que} novum stabit cinctum florente corona, Pingens purpureo venantia prata colore, Ver pallidum vario nectit•• de flore coronas, Vere novo lectis decorantur floribus arva, Veris honos tepidum floret: vere omnia rident.

De aestate.

Stabat nuda aestas & spicea serta gerebat, Horrida{que} Aethiopis signis imitata figuram, Scindit agros aestas Phaebeis ignibus ardens, Torrida fert arvis aestas frugifera mella, Flava Ceres aestatis habet sua tempore regna.

De autumno.

Stabat & Autumnus calcatis surdibus uvis, Libra per autumnum musto spumantia fervent. Pomifer Autumnus tenero dat palmite fructum,

[illustration]

Vite coronatas Autumnus degravat ulnos, Faecundos Autumne locos de vitibus imples.

De Hyeme▪

Stabat Hyems glacies canos hirsuta capillos, Cujus nix humeros circundat, flumina montes Praecipitant, semperque riget glacie horrida barba▪ Albentes haec durat aquas & flumina nectit, Tristis Hyems niveo montes velamine vestit.

CHAP. VII. Hereafter followeth the second part of the Compost and Kalender, which sheweth of the tree of Vices, and of the pains of Hell.

IN the name of the Father, the Son and the holy Ghost Amen, We purpose to shew the tree of vices, for sinners to take exam∣ple by, to understand their sinnes: which is divided in twelve principall parts, after the seven deadly sins, and each deadly sin is likened to a tree, and every tree having eight small branches, and all these seven trees come out of one tree by it self▪ that is, e∣vil and comes of one beginning, and that is the devil, and it bideth an end that is, everlasting damnation, which is ordained for all them that seek not remedy betimes by penance and repentance of their life in time.

After this tree of vices followeth the pains of hell, to shew the lay peo∣ple what punishment is ordained for every deadly sin, and that the people may better shew their sins in contrition▪ and make clean their conscience, and that they may be the houses of God▪ so that vertues may grow & fruc∣tifie to the profit of their souls. The first great branch of the tree of vices, is pride and he hath xvii. branches grow in out of him, as vain glory of himself, vain-glory of the world▪ praising himself in evill, boasting of sin, inobedient disdain▪ to tempt God, excesse, dispraising▪ false goodness har∣diness, presumption, rebellion, obstination, sin wittingly, communing of the sacrament, shame to do good Out of every the which branches springeth three branches, and out of every the said three branches groweth three small branches, to the number of sevenscore and thirteen, and in so ma∣ny manner of ways ye may sin in the sin of pride, which is the root and beginning of all the seven deadly sins, and therefore shall be shewed first of pride▪ and after the other six sins as they follow in order.

[illustration]

• ...
  The i. branch of Pride. Vain-glory of himself.
  • ...
    Seeking ioy and not the glo∣ry of God.
    • When any weeneth his goods come of himself.
    • Or that such goods be due for their merits.
    • If they beleeve to have, or to know more than they do
  • ...
    Hypocrisy.
    • Dissembling by words to be better than they be,
    • Seeming by works to be good and be not.
    • Desiring praise for his good deeds by other
  • ...
    Dispraising themselves for to have praise.
    • To dispraise his deeds that other should praise them
    • To repent his doings because they be dispraised.
    • Dispraising himself that others may praise him.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Pride. Vain-glory of the world.
  • ...
    For riches.
    • When they ween to be the better for their goods.
    • Or weeneth to be worse without them.
    • To be ashamed that they lack riches in their need.
  • ...
    For pompes.
    • Delighting him to have a great houshold▪
    • Reioycing them in the fair shape of their bodies.
    • Or in new fashion▪ or multitude of his clothes.
  • ...
    For honours.
    • When they desire to be honoured with other good
    • Willing to be honored and dread.
    • Or to the end it may be said that they be mighty.
• ...
  The iii. branch of Pride. Glad of evill doing.
  • ...
    Declaring their sins.
    • For to be praised of cursed and unhappy people.
    • Or for to shew that they be prompt to evill doing.
    • Delighting in recordation of his evill deeds.
  • ...
    Being glad that they be evill.
    • For that they love the friendship of the world.
    • Or for they doubt not the righteousnesse of God.
    • Or else they love not God with their heart.
  • ...
    To have no shame of evill doing.
    • For they know not which is vertue ne vice.
    • Nor to amend themselves be not willing.
    • For to be seen gladly when he doth evill.
• ...
  The iiii. branch of Pride. Boasting of sin.
  • ...
    Praising thy self.
    • Openly before all folks or few.
    • Or secretly before one, or by himself.
    • Seeking occasion for to be praised only▪
  • ...
    In shewing themselves bet∣ter than they be
    • Covering their evills that they be not seen▪
    • Telling their good deeds that they may be known
    • Hiding their sins that they appear not great.
  • ...
    Weening that they be wise and be not.
    • To be great in iudgement with himself only.
    • Dispraising the understanding of other▪
    • Preferring their own vertue before the grace of God
• ...

• ...
  The v. branch of Pride. Inobedience.
  • ...
    Openly gain-saying.
    • Dispraising his master or them that be above him.
    • Dispraising the merits that come of obedience.
    • Desiring to be such that he may gain-say others.
  • ...
    Doing unduly all that they ought to do.
    • When negligently they do that they ought to do.
    • Or when they do it otherwise than appertaineth.
    • Or to let domage and to have profit.
  • ...
    For to require grace importu∣nate.
    • When they have custome in sin and fall oft therein.
    • Enviously and frowardly asking grace for it.
    • Insatiatly persevering without amending.
• ...
  The vi. branch of Pride. Disdain.
  • ...
    Dispraising other.
    • For their ignorance and fault of understanding.
    • For their poverty and scarcenesse of riches.
    • For their sicknesse and default of members.
  • ...
    Preferring themselves be∣fore other.
    • Shewing himself cunning in some works.
    • In praising their deeds dispraise them of other.
    • In considering of lesse than he, exalt himself.
  • ...
    Dispraising o∣ther lesse than himself.
    • That will compare themselves for riches or science.
    • Or they which be almost as great as he.
    • Or which in things abovesaid are above him.
• ...
  The vii. branch of Pride. To tempt God.
  • ...
    Desiring to sin∣full living.
    • For they consider but sensible things.
    • For they will not beleeve things they see not.
    • To iudge things to come or they happen.
  • ...
    To expose themselves in perill.
    • To beleeve themselves that God should deliver them
    • Or to dispraise and dye in such dangerous peril.
    • Or beleeve in destinys that otherwise it may not be
  • ...
    Not helping themselves from perill.
    • For they will use no reason for to help themselves.
    • For they will use their own folly without counsel.
    • For they be too slothfull, not willing to labour.
• ...
  The viii. branch of Pride▪ Excesse.
  • ...
    To go before thy betters un∣worthily.
    • Vsurping the might that they ought not to have.
    • Exceeding the power to them committed or given.
    • Treating them evil that be under their puissance.
  • ...
    To abstain them overmuch▪
    • For they be lesse worthy in such authority.
    • For they are too cruel to them that be subiect.
    • To make himself hated and may profit by fair speech.
  • ...
    To oppresse the poor men or ser∣vants.
    • By might or riches of his friends.
    • For violence that the soveraigns may do.
    • For the riches or great goods that they have.
• ...

• ...
  The ix. branch of Pride. Disprasing.
  • ...
    Putting his soul in perill.
    • Being in deadly sin without repenting him.
    • Being in sin and care not for to know it.
    • Or to understand it and reioyce of it.
  • ...
    Caring not for things to come.
    • Not beleeving the life to come for the good people▪
    • Beleeving the life to come, but not stedfastly.
    • Or to beleeve it well, and not amend their lives.
  • ...
    Prefer the body to the soul.
    • Being diligent to the body, and negligent to the soul
    • Desiring temporall goods and not spirituall▪
    • Nourishing continually the flesh in delights.
• ...
  The x. branch of Pride. False goodnesse.
  • ...
    Vnrightfull to be dispraised.
    • For his presumption, arrogancy and pride.
    • For his vain-glory▪ vantuing and praising.
    • Or for to shew to live of advantage.
  • ...
    Vniustly willing to be praised.
    • When thy delight in worldly lovings▪
    • When they have dread to be dispraised,
    • For to desire to be honoured without cause.
  • ...
    To do good in an evill intent.
    • For ignorance when they beleeve not to do good.
    • Wickedly do good in hope that it shall turn to evill.
    • Fraudulently doing it for to deceive other.
• ...
  The xi. branch of Pride. Hardness.
  • ...
    Being unkind in their deeds.
    • To be presumptuous, and not prove the truth.
    • By entreating over straightly the rightfull things▪
    • Travelling more than of right them that be iust.
  • ...
    To be fierce and over cruell.
    • When there is none affection ne love unto other.
    • To find new manners to do evill.
    • To have no shame to do cruelty.
  • ...
    Importunity.
    • When one desireth a thing ever continually.
    • Or when one is over-hasty to have his duty.
    • Or to be over envious in asking it.
• ...
  The xii. branch of Pride. Presumption.
  • ...
    Beleeve no man but themself.
    • In gainsaying alway in the deeds of other▪
    • Not beleeving that other then do good for God.
    • For his own deeds to be content of himself.
  • ...
    Speaking of high things.
    • Exalting himself and shewing that he is great.
    • To contrary his neighbours, or other such.
    • In blaspheming God and holy Saints.
  • ...
    Beleeve more in himself than he should do.
    • When any will not know their own defaults.
    • When any dispraiseth the faults of other.
    • Vndertaking to come that they may not.
• ...

• ...
  The xiii. branch of Pride. Rebellion.
  • ...
    Harden him self in fighting.
    • That may not suf••er patiently to be smitten.
    • To grudge against the will of God.
    • For to be smitten, blaspheme God and his saints▪
  • ...
    Resist to God.
    • To let any good to be done,
    • Not to help to do good when they may,
    • Or to be sorry that any body should do good.
  • ...
    To uphold e∣vill.
    • For to do sin more liberally.
    • For familiarity that they have to him that sinneth.
    • Or that this sin that they defend.
• ...
  The xiiii. branch of Pride. Obstination.
  • ...
    By fasting.
    • Will not hear their betters to teach them good.
    • Ne to do thereafter n•• mendeth them no••.
    • Wilfully to do evill for to be mended.
  • ...
    Not willing to forsake evil doing.
    • For they will not leave their evill custome▪
    • Or els they give not them to do good.
    • Or that they reioyce them in evill doing.
  • ...
    To be hardned in evill.
    • To do against things that are doubtfull.
    • To beleeve that thing good that is not▪
    • To give themselves to evill without remedy.
• ...
  The xv branch of Pride. Sinne wittingly.
  • ...
    Sinning dead∣ly.
    • By presumption or understanding to do evil.
    • Or by ignorance that they will not understand.
    • Desiring and provoking themself to do evill.
  • ...
    Sinning veni∣ally.
    • For to follow evill company
    • For custome to do any venial sin▪
    • To end one sin that they may end another.
  • ...
    In thought deadly or ve∣nially.
    • By cogitations in their heart onely.
    • By words said lightly.
    • Or by work done undiscreetly.
• ...
  The xvi. branch of Pride. Cōmuning of the sacra.
  • ...
    Singing of service.
    • And to be in any heresy.
    • Or to be in sutes of cursing.
    • Or wittingly in deadly sin.
  • ...
    Ministring the sacraments.
    • Lesse than his duty and unworthily.
    • Without reverence and undevoutly.
    • Without doing their duty to the people discreet∣ly.
  • ...
    Receive the body of Iesus Christ.
    • Without honour, devotion and reverence.
    • Theftously, and of that they should not receive it
    • To say against them that are more wiser than he
• ...

• ...
  The xvii. branch of Pride. Shame to do good
  • ...
    Willing to be good and have shame.
    • By weaknesse and fault of courage.
    • For to love negligently any good that may be.
    • By weening that it is shame which is honour.
  • ...
    Having shame to be good and is not.
    • When they will accomplish the will of any person.
    • Or when any loveth that which is not good.
    • Or when they be sloathfull for to do good.
  • ...
    For to be like them that be evill.
    • When they reioyce them in evill company.
    • To shew the damage of himself and other.
    • For to obtain that he desireth.

¶Here endeth the branches and small spraies of the sinne of Pride, and here∣after followeth the branches and spraies of Envy, and the names of them all in order as they come. The first is noysomenesse, the second is Detracti∣on, the third is Adulation, the fourth Susurration, the fift sin is against the holy Ghost, the sixt Suspection, the seventh Accusation, the eighth Ex∣cusation, the ix. Vnthankfullnesse, the x. to iudge, the xi. Substraction, the twelfth drawing other to sin, the thirteenth false love.

• ...
  The first branch of Envy. Noysomness.
  • ...
    Sorrow of the wealth of his neighbour.
    • For to desire thy neighbours harm.
    • For thou maist not sustain to see his wealth.
    • To the end that thou maist oppresse them in misery.
  • ...
    Not glad of the wealth of his neighbour.
    • When he hath done iniury in time past,
    • Or hath not given to thee that thou requiredst.
    • Or thou maist not see the increasing of his good.
  • ...
    To be glad of his neighbours hurt.
    • That thou dost to him, or art causer.
    • Or of that other doth and not thy self.
    • Or that he suffereth by the iustice divine.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Envy. Detraction.
  • ...
    For cause of lightnesse.
    • By evill accustomance so for to do.
    • Or to accomplish the will of some folk.
    • Not taking heed if their words may annoy other.
  • ...
    For cruel hate.
    • Finding any ill that is not good ne faithfull.
    • In reporting that they heard say▪ or that it is true
    • To say they have heard ill by other and have not.
  • ...
    In lying wit∣tingly.
    • To the end to cause some to have trouble & domage.
    • To the end that no wealth come to him they hate.
    • Or to the end that he be thereby defamed.
• ...

• ...
  The iii. branch of Envy. Adulation.
  • ...
    To annoy un∣der colour of good favour.
    • To say that they know the which they know not.
    • That they understand to be greater than it is.
    • Nourish, sustain, or defend other in folly.
  • ...
    Nourish ill in fair semblance.
    • Saying that profiteth or noyeth by flattery.
    • Sometime flatter veniall, sometime mortall,
    • Saying evil behind, and fair before.
  • ...
    Holding his peace suffering to do ill.
    • For to have any winning or profit,
    • For to compare or please some person,
    • Or not to lose the love of him that doth evill.
• ...
  The iiii. branch of Envy. Susurration.
  • ...
    Causing dis∣cord and strife▪
    • By perswasions moving the parties.
    • Or by false tales and making of lesings,
    • And in reporting of cursed language.
  • ...
    Making strife to last long.
    • For thou wilt have a mans love onely,
    • Or thou wouldest have help to annoy another.
    • Or not caring for the wealth of them that be at discord,
  • ...
    Not labouring for peace.
    • By malice, that thou wouldst not have the peace made.
    • For thou wilt not travel for to make peace.
    • And being diligent to travel for it.
• ...
  The v. branch of Envy. Sin aga. the holy ghost.
  • ...
    Slandering the good people.
    • Turning their good name into evill.
    • Seeking means for to trouble their minds.
    • Withdrawing them from the love of people.
  • ...
    Weening that it is pain to serve God.
    • In abusing them of the graces of God.
    • Being sloathfull in doing good works.
    • Not loving God.
  • ...
    Not helping the good people.
    • The which suffereth for the love of God,
    • Or for penance of their sins,
    • Or for to get the glory of our Lord.
• ...
  The vi. branch of Envy. Suspection.
  • ...
    To beleeve too soon.
    • By whatsoever occasion indifferently.
    • To beleeve any thing that is said shortly,
    • Be it true or false without any advisement.
  • ...
    Beleeving over faithfully.
    • That the which thou shouldest not beleeve.
    • Or that thou art over light in beleeving,
    • Or that thou iudgest the good without discretion,
  • ...
    Oft times to beleeve.
    • Things unbeleevable and which may not be.
    • When divers times thou hast been deceived,
    • For thou maist not but beleeve.
• ...

• ...
  The vii. branch of Envy. Accusation.
  • ...
    Of troth.
    • When it is for vengeance of him that is accused.
    • When it is for lightness that they have to accuse other.
    • Or to please him to whom they do accuse unto.
  • ...
    Falsely.
    • When they find the evill with which they accuse.
    • When they know him that they accuse not guilty.
    • When they accuse the guilty because of hate.
  • ...
    Of doubtfull things.
    • Seeking occasion to noy him that is accused.
    • Affirming to be true the uncertainty of their accuse.
    • Imposing the harm that they ween be, and know it not
• ...
  The viii. branch of Envy. Excusation.
  • ...
    By words
    • Which be doubtfull having double understanding.
    • Manifestly, and which they know to be false.
    • Seeking occasion to hide the evill deed.
  • ...
    By force of swearing.
    • Putting the fault on him that did it not.
    • For to shew himself innocent of the fault.
    • For to avoid the punishment of his fault.
  • ...
    By the holy gospell.
    • Though he be constrained to forswear him.
    • And worse if they do it wilfully.
    • Or to swear ere they know wherefore they swear.
• ...
  The ix branch of Envy. Vnthankfullnesse.
  • ...
    Not knowing the benefits of God.
    • How much or how well they have done.
    • By what bounty for without desert he giveth us them.
    • Or what thing is worthy to retribute to himself.
  • ...
    Doing ill for good.
    • To him which did help thee in thy need.
    • Vnto him which counselled thee in thy necessity.
    • Vnto him that defended and kept thee from perill.
  • ...
    Not yeelding goodnesse for goodnesse.
    • But done evill to him that hath done thee good.
    • Neither do evil nor good to him that did thee good.
    • For receiving a great benefit yeild a small.
• ...
  The x branch of Envy. To Iudge.
  • ...
    The deeds of other not ap∣pertaining.
    • By ignorance ere they know him.
    • In doubt of that which they know not.
    • Or to iudge without being required,
  • ...
    Doing false iudgements.
    • For any gifts received or to receive.
    • For love or for hate.
    • Lightly for certain malice.
  • ...
    Evil to be good or contrarily.
    • By lightnesse for they been accustomed.
    • Or so to do weening to do it by sport.
    • Or wittingly willing for to annoy another.
• ...

• ...
  The xi branch of Envy. Substraction.
  • ...
    In temporall things.
    • Not giving to the poor goods that be superfluous.
    • Retaining lawfull goods without departing.
    • Goods that are exposed in evill usages
  • ...
    In spirituall things.
    • Not being busie about the salvation of sinners.
    • Not admonishing sinners to leave their sin.
    • Not shewing to other the good that they can.
  • ...
    Or of Counsel.
    • Not giving counsell to them that ask it.
    • Or giving evill counsell willingly.
    • Not counselling when they may them that do ill.
• ...
  The xii. of branch of Envy. Drawing other to sin.
  • ...
    By example.
    • When they do evill afore their subiects.
    • When any leadeth another in company to do ill.
    • Or under the colour of good do great hurt.
  • ...
    By counsell.
    • Drawing the great to ill, that thine may shew lesse.
    • Or by their sin more delectably,
    • And be glad that they consent to sin with them.
  • ...
    By force.
    • Of requiring or admonishing.
    • Not ceasing till they consent to evill.
    • By oppression, and in constraining them.
• ...
  The xiii. branch of Envy. False love.
  • ...
    For the love and favour of man.
    • Them that favor thee and do thy will:
    • Them that may noy thee to the end they do not.
    • To the end thou maist be seen gentle and meek.
  • ...
    For earthly profit.
    • Feigning thee to be a friend to him, and art not.
    • Feigning that thou lovest him more than thou dost.
    • Shewing to be his friend, and art his enemy.
  • ...
    For fleshly hu∣manity.
    • Defending or sustaining any in their evill.
    • Promoting them which art not worthy to be.
    • For to labour to live more deliciously.

¶Here endeth the branches and small spraies of Envy, and followeth the branches and small sprays of wrath, as Iniquity, Hatred, Continuall, Con∣senting, Frowardly, Homicide, Vengeance, Impatience, Clamour, Blasphe∣my. And out of each of these ten branches, commeth nine other small bran∣ches, and so the whole number is xcix. branches, the which letteth a man that he may not love Gode ne his own soul, and for this sin it is hard to be accusto∣med in a man, and be saved.

• ...
  The i. branch of Wrath. Iniquity,
  • ...
    Mocking him∣self.
    • Leting other to love that mocketh thee,
    • For declarations that thou hast in mocking.
    • Or that thou art accustomed so to do.
  • ...
    Cursing.
    • Other in his thought without speaking.
    • Or of his mouth by words.
    • Sowing discord and noyse between people.
  • ...
    Deceiving.
    • Giving wilfull counsell for to do evill.
    • Awaiting the sinner for to do evill.
    • Seeing sin, and not reprove it when they may.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Wrath. Hatred.
  • ...
    Discord.
    • By manifests and rancours.
    • Seeming a friend and have rancour at the heart
    • For to make peace and keep malice in thy mind
  • ...
    Iniury.
    • In defaming other.
    • In taking his goods from him.
    • In hurting his body or his good name.
  • ...
    Conspiration.
    • to schismatise or procure division in the Church
    • Coniuring in persons in good or in evill.
    • Conspiring in any works.
• ...
  The iii. branch of Wrath. Continuing in vility.
  • ...
    Reprevings.
    • Pepreeve the poverty in which they are.
    • The flagellations that they have or had.
    • Or that they be come of a poor kindred.
  • ...
    Sharp words.
    • Provoking other to anger.
    • Full of repreeving and iniurys.
    • Such as may bear hurt and damage,
  • ...
    Greeving his neighbours.
    • By outragious words and sayings.
    • By hurting of his person, or homicide.
    • For to take from him his goods or renown.
• ...
  The iiii. branch of Wrath. Consenting.
  • ...
    Not amending
    • When they have domination upon the sinner.
    • Or when he is familiar with them.
    • That helpeth to do evill and might let it.
  • ...
    Reioycing in evill.
    • Praising and reioycing the sinners.
    • And not to mourn for the sin they have done.
    • Nor correcting them that be evill.
  • ...
    Hoping to do evill.
    • By help that thou givest to them.
    • For thou defendest them that do evill.
    • By counsell that thou givest.
• ...

• ...
  The v. branch of Wrath. Frowardly.
  • ...
    Impugning goodnesse.
    • Beleeving in any heresy.
    • For to have meat and drink.
    • For the love of one and hate of another.
  • ...
    Hanting strifes.
    • By customance, for the reioyce in them.
    • By manifest hate that they will make appear.
    • By secret rancours in their hearts.
  • ...
    Strife by words
    • As in questions inutile and froward.
    • For to shew his science.
    • For to gainsay him to whom they speak.
• ...
  The vi. branch of Wrath. Homicide.
  • ...
    In defending.
    • Having will to slay and kill.
    • Himself or other without will to slay.
    • To slay unadvisedly or ignorantly.
  • ...
    Slaying wilful∣ly.
    • By treason.
    • By hate.
    • For he which they slay is good.
  • ...
    Which they ween not to e∣vill.
    • Weening to do well and do slay some man.
    • In coniecturing any thing ioyously.
    • Or by him give any medicine.
• ...
  The vii. branch of Wrath. Vengeance.
  • ...
    For wrong do∣ing.
    • Saying semblable iniuries.
    • In saying more greater iniuries.
    • Or iniuries though that they been lesse.
  • ...
    Weening that it be his domage and is not.
    • Noying him that correcteth thee for thy wealth.
    • Or do evill to him that doth thee good,
    • If it displease thee they have done for thy weal.
  • ...
    By fault of something.
    • If any giveth or lendeth thee not their goods.
    • That he hath not done that he is not bound to do.
    • Or hath not holpen thee to do thy ill will.
• ...
  The viii. branch of Wrath. Impatience.
  • ...
    In iudgements of God.
    • When that which pleaseth God displeaseth thee.
    • Or for the will of God pleaseth thee not.
    • Or thou hatest that which God would have done▪
  • ...
    In his wret∣chednesse.
    • If thou be in any malady or sicknesse.
    • Or if thou be in great poverty and need.
    • Or if thou have any troubles or adversitys.
  • ...
    Of wrongs of his neighbours.
    • For they have missaid thee in words,
    • Or they have misdone to thy person.
    • Or they have misdone in thy goods.
• ...

• ...
  The ix. branch of Wrath. Clamour.
  • ...
    Debate for in u∣tile things.
    • As of beauty and fairnesse of women.
    • Or of his linage, friends and parents.
    • Or of things which do annoy.
  • ...
    To make lea∣sing and false tales.
    • By very malice and hate.
    • By vaunting, craking, and boasting.
    • By fraud and unfaithfullnesse,
  • ...
    Clattering.
    • To vanquish by force of speaking.
    • Or for to annoy by clattering.
    • Or for pleasure that they take in it:
• ...
  The x. branch of Wrath. Blaspheming.
  • ...
    Knowing of God the which appertaineth not to him.
    • As of his soveraign, might, and puissance.
    • Or of great goodnesse in us.
    • Or of his right wise iustice.
  • ...
    Affirming of good things unworthily.
    • By any error in which they be.
    • For dread and fear of loosing.
    • For covetise of winning.
  • ...
    To say that is good that is not
    • In beleeving as doth Idolaters.
    • In opinion by evill understanding.
    • Doing against the ordinances of the Church.

Here endeth the br••nches and small spraies of the sinne of Wrath. And here∣after followeth the xvii. branches of Sloth, as Evil thought, Annoy of wealth, readinesse to evill Pusilanimity Evill will, breaking vowes, Impenitence, In∣fidelity, Ignorance, Vain Sorrow, slowly, evill hope, Curiosity, Idlenesse, E∣vagation, letting to do good, Desolation. Out of the which xvii. branches commeth Cliv small branches, which bringeth a man to everlasting damnation and pains perpetuall.

• ...
  The first branch of Sloth. Ev••l thought.
  • ...
    Superfluous thoughts.
    • To delight in thinking evil.
    • Thinking that sin is a sweet thing.
    • Long abiding in thinking evill.
  • ...
    Dolorous cogi∣tations.
    • How they may hurt any secretly.
    • That imputeth his deed unto other.
    • How doing evill they may be said good.
  • ...
    Detestable thought.
    • How they may do evill.
    • How doing evil they may persevere
    • How they may resist to the good.
• ...

• ...
  The ii. branch of Sloth. Annoy of wealth.
  • ...
    To sinne by cu∣stome.
    • For that other sinneth in like wise.
    • For the custome is so for to do.
    • For there is none that reproveth the evill doing.
  • ...
    Sinning by malice.
    • When any loveth evill, and doth accomplish it.
    • When any loveth the good and doth it not.
    • When any hateth the good and loveth the evill.
  • ...
    Or by desire not to love it.
    • When any doth good against his will.
    • When any reioyceth not in doing good.
    • When it displeaseth them not if they do evill.
• ...
  The iii. branch of Sloth. Readiness to ill.
  • ...
    By constance.
    • In leaving the good which they know.
    • Changing oft times their purpose and counsell.
    • Weak in adversity, and raise himself in prospe∣rity.
  • ...
    By pusillanimi∣ty.
    • Withdrawing him from the good.
    • Mistrusting in the grace of God.
    • Fearing to begin any good thing.
  • ...
    By curiosity.
    • Seeking new things and unprofitable.
    • Pleasantly to hear tales and fables.
    • Seeking new tydings by his own will.
• ...
  The iiii. branch of Sloth. Pusillanimity.
  • ...
    Dread where they ought not.
    • Dreading that which is to come is no domage.
    • Loosing the spirituall goods for the temporall.
    • If temporall adversity seem over grievous.
  • ...
    Dread more than they should
    • Making great sorrow for that thou hast lost.
    • Sorrowing that they have which they desire.
    • Making sorrow if any thing hap against thy will
  • ...
    Dread them they should not.
    • As detractors when thou livest iustly.
    • As defending the evill for to please them.
    • Or it noyeth them not if any do well.
• ...
  The v. branch of Sloth. Evill will.
  • ...
    Will to do evill.
    • That it be to the dishonor of God
    • To the damage and preiudice of his neighbours.
    • To the damnation of the soul.
  • ...
    Customably for to do evill.
    • For the declaration of thy evill.
    • For the displeasure of the good.
    • For they do that which they please and will.
  • ...
    Delighting in evill as much as they may.
    • Not resisting evill cogitations.
    • Loving evill delectations.
    • Appetiting that they may delight in evill.
• ...

• ...
  The vi. branch of Sloth. Breaking vows.
  • ...
    By negligence.
    • When any maketh a vow and mispraiseth to do it.
    • That doth lesse to vow then he hath promised.
    • That fullfilleth not his vow as he should
  • ...
    By forgetting.
    • Of secret vows or things to them belonging.
    • Of vow promised to himself or other.
    • Of vow made to enter into religion.
  • ...
    By dispraising.
    • Not accomplishing his vow when he may
    • Or that may not and doth none other good semblable
    • Or that they have no letting for to accomplish it.
• ...
  The vii. branch of Sloth. Impenitence.
  • ...
    Living and do no penance.
    • By finall penance and never to repent.
    • By delation from day to day of repenting.
    • By misprising that they will not repent them.
  • ...
    Not having shame to sin.
    • When after sin they be ready to sin again.
    • When they shame not of the sin they have done.
    • Or without sorrow reioyce them to have done ill.
  • ...
    Purpose for to sin.
    • Being in will to accomplish mortall sinne.
    • After they have sinned purpose to abide in it.
    • Seeking occasion to fall into every sin.
• ...
  The viii. branch of Sloth. Infidelity.
  • ...
    Not beleeving that they should beleeve.
    • As the Iews beleeved, and other unfaithfull men.
    • That will not hear the articles of the faith.
    • Or that heareth them and will not beleeve in them.
  • ...
    Beleeving that they should not.
    • In false Gods as doe the Sarazens.
    • In Idols or in some Simulachres.
    • Or beleeve in devilish things as witches do.
  • ...
    Beleeving un∣stedfastly.
    • Doubt in that they ought to beleeve stedfastly.
    • Beleeve, and not stedfastly as they ought to do.
    • Easily to let himself be deceived of his faith.
• ...
  The ix. branch of Sloth. Ignorance.
  • ...
    Indiscretion.
    • Do without counsell which should be counselled.
    • Doing without manner they ought to hold.
    • Doing without wisedome things that is needfull.
  • ...
    That they ought to under∣stand.
    • Dispraising knowledge, and will not be taught.
    • Not travelling to learn that they ought to know.
    • Not purposing and not caring for to learn.
  • ...
    Not willing to know.
    • For they run, and will take no pain to learn.
    • For to have excusation of not knowing.
    • For sloth and negligence of learning.
• ...

• ...
  The x. branch of Sloth. Vain sorrow.
  • ...
    In noysomness of living.
    • When good things bee displeasant.
    • When all things been annoying.
    • When all that they do is done heavily.
  • ...
    False hope.
    • Presuming too much of the mercy of God.
    • Not going from sin, trust in the mercy of God.
    • Living in sin without the dread of God.
  • ...
    Dispraising.
    • For the straightnesse of iustice of God.
    • For the greatness of the sinne that they have cōmited.
    • To mistrust in the mercy of God.
• ...
  The xi. branch of Sloth. Slownesse.
  • ...
    Toward for∣bidden things.
    • When any exposeth him too much in perill of sin.
    • When any are too much assured for to do sin.
    • When any exposeth him too much in temptations.
  • ...
    Toward hol∣some counsell.
    • Not willing to be good, and leave the doing ill.
    • Not honoring the good, and love it better than the ill.
    • Dispraising the counsell of good folk.
  • ...
    Toward the commandement
    • Not doing the commandement that they ought.
    • Dispraising the commandement, or him that made it.
    • Not loving any thing that is commanded.
• ...
  The xii. branch of Sloth. Evill hope.
  • ...
    Despise men of good fame.
    • Continuing in doing evill operations.
    • In having hope to do evill all only.
    • Or doing them both together.
  • ...
    Not fearing shame.
    • Not caring what thing is said of thee.
    • Nor caring if any be slandered by thee.
    • Not seeking that any be edified by thee.
  • ...
    Doing good in evill intention.
    • Fraudulently and thou knowest it well.
    • Without discretion not caring to whom nor how.
    • Cauteously for thou wilt not know it.
• ...
  The xiii. branch of Sloth. Curiosity.
  • ...
    Seeking un∣profitable things.
    • Willing to understand the thing that is cause of sin
    • Laboring to confound other by force of language.
    • For to be called wise of Ideots and fools.
  • ...
    Delighting to vain things.
    • To draw and go to such as be dissolutio••s.
    • Or that they do and make dissolute.
    • Or make thee take heed unto all vanities.
  • ...
    Doing that none other can do.
    • Making new things that were never seen.
    • Or that they learn things that be evill.
    • Or things that bee only for to make folk laugh.
• ...

• ...
  The xiv. branch of Sloth. Idlenesse.
  • ...
    Ceasing to do good.
    • That is to say, good cogitations.
    • To good words.
    • And to good works.
  • ...
    Seeking to do evill.
    • That is, to know the concupiscence of the flesh.
    • The concupisence of the eyne is avarice.
    • And to live proudly.
  • ...
    Not resisting to do evill.
    • For love that they have to evill.
    • For annoy they have to goodnesse.
    • For negligence of themselves.
• ...
  The xv. branch of Sloth. Evagation.
  • ...
    In idle things.
    • Exposing him in vanities.
    • Not withdrawing him from vanities.
    • Willing to abide in vanities.
  • ...
    Or delectable things.
    • For they been evill and pleasant.
    • Abiding by long time and space.
    • When thy will is thereunto provoked.
  • ...
    And wicked things.
    • How cautiously they may endomage and hurt.
    • Or the more grievously hinder.
    • Or the more longer annoy.
• ...
  The xvi. branch of Sloth. Letting to do good.
  • ...
    Consenting to them that do evill.
    • By malice for to accomplish their will.
    • For hate that they have to the good folk.
    • Or for hate of good they might do.
  • ...
    Not helping the good.
    • When they may have no profit without they help.
    • There as they be in perill.
    • Whereas they defail without having succour.
  • ...
    Hindering the good.
    • As by himself.
    • Or by other persons.
    • Or hold from them that they owe them.
• ...
  The xvii. branch of Sloth. Dissolution.
  • ...
    As in vain things.
    • In the beholding folk sporting them by vanity.
    • Setting their eye to behold any vanity.
    • Being in places popular and publike.
  • ...
    In wanton things.
    • In lusts of the body.
    • In lightnesse of courage.
    • By force of singing and crying▪
  • ...
    Or in foolish reioycing.
    • By laughing too much and over long.
    • To be without gravity when they should be so
    • To provoke other to laugh.

Here beginneth the twenty branches and boughs of Covetise, as com∣punction, Rapine, Vsury, with-holding debt, Not yeelding commited, Si∣mony, Sacriledge, Theft, being proprietary, taking gifts uniustly, To have too much, Expending abundantly, Fraude, false compunction, Lea∣sing, Swearing, Forswearing, False witnesse, Plays, being vagabond. Of the which twenty branches commeth other small twiggs or bran∣ches to the number of an hundred and thirty. And so the whole number of them is an hundred and fifty.

• ...
  The first branch of Covetise. Compunction.
  • ...
    Solicitude of thought.
    • Forget the spirituall goods for the temporall goods.
    • Be negligent to the spiritual, diligēt to the temporal.
    • Dispraise the goods of the soul for them of the body.
  • ...
    How to winne without conve∣nance.
    • Holding that without noysance they ne may.
    • Procuring goods of other for to have profit.
    • Willing to have profit for their solicitude.
  • ...
    And may not withdraw them from it.
    • Getting temporall goods by great delectation.
    • Being holden in love to get temporall goods.
    • Or to vaunt him to get more than he can.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Covetise. Rapine.
  • ...
    Taking by force the goods of other.
    • To his subiects, or lesse than he.
    • To his enemies by what manner that it be.
    • To his neighbour by subtil mean.
  • ...
    Doing violence.
    • To his subiects for him of temporall goods.
    • Or likewise by spiritual things with threatnings.
    • Or in spirituall things making promises.
  • ...
    By curveis and subsedies.
    • Doing unduly without right and reason.
    • Or that before they were accustomed so to do.
    • Or that they be done by force of threatnings.
• ...
  The iii. branch of Covetise. Vsury.
  • ...
    By covenant made.
    • When any sels the dearer because of abiding.
    • Lend mony to have more largely.
    • Or for because they lend and do abide.
  • ...
    Without cove∣nant, but in hope.
    • Not lend without they have a pledge.
    • Or by signs to be sure to win by lending.
    • When any receiveth or lendeth to have benefit.
  • ...
    To sell for more for giving days,
    • As be open usurers.
    • Or that they think to get mony by they sell.
    • Or by accustomance so for to sell.
• ...

• ...
  The iiii. branch of Covetise. Withholding.
  • ...
    Denying it.
    • Debt thou knowest well thou dost owe.
    • Or the debt thou hast forgotten.
    • The which is openly know that thou owest.
  • ...
    Or stealing it.
    • Hoping to give it him another time.
    • Without will to give it him, though thou may.
    • Not having power to pay, and ask no mercy.
  • ...
    To forget it.
    • Which be paid and ask it him again.
    • Not giving children that they have of their friends
    • Detaining willingly that to other belongeth.
• ...
  The v. branch of Covetise. not yeild. things commised
  • ...
    Withholding them by deed.
    • By strength or violence distribute them to himself.
    • By fraud make them to lose them that owe them.
    • Saying they hold them under colour of love,
  • ...
    Defer for to yeeld them.
    • To the end mean while they may profit them.
    • Or that by some mean they may keep them.
    • Or to have meed for yeelding them.
  • ...
    Lending them to other.
    • To have recompence for such lending.
    • By curiosity to lend that which is not his.
    • By ambition to say is his which is not▪
• ...
  The vi. branch of Covetise. Simony.
  • ...
    Selling spiri∣tuall things by words.
    • To people adulterous by their flattering.
    • By leading of processe and to unworthy people.
    • By the evill words of other.
  • ...
    Selling spiri∣tuall things. by price.
    • And taken before such thing be common.
    • Or taken after they be common.
    • Putting cause wherefore the same was not.
  • ...
    Selling spiritu¦all things by praiers.
    • Sometime doing with threatnings.
    • Or sometime without threatnings.
    • And sometime with violence and force.
• ...
  The vii. branch of Covetise. Sacrilege.
  • ...
    Taking sacred things in holy places.
    • As the goods of the Church to be taken in th•• Church
    • Withholding dismes and things of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉
    • Taking the goods of the Church undeserved
  • ...
    Or hallowed things in place not hallowed.
    • Taking the goods of the Church where they ••e
    • Vnworthily distributing the goods of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉
    • A lay man having dismes saying to be his.
  • ...
    Or things not hallowed in holy places.
    • By quests or any thing longing to the Church
    • All goods for surety put in the Church.
    • Things or casualties to them allowed
• ...

• ...
  The viii. branch of Covetise. Theft.
  • ...
    stealing with∣out it be known.
    • For him that thou robbst did thee domage aforetime.
    • Or thou dost it of thy proper malice.
    • Or for thy simplenesse and ignorance.
  • ...
    Having the goods of other hiding them.
    • For to withhold them more peaceably.
    • For fear to be punished.
    • Or for thou wilt always persevere in ill.
  • ...
    Consenting to him that doth evill.
    • For it pleaseth thee that such robbery be done.
    • Or thou hast profit by such robbery.
    • Or for thou fearest him that doth such theft.
• ...
  The ix. branch of Covetise. Being proprietary.
  • ...
    A religious of the goods of his religion.
    • To have without knowledge of his prelate.
    • Or by consent of the prelate which appertaineth not.
    • Or have licence to approper too much to him.
  • ...
    Men or wo∣men married.
    • Whē one hath good without knowledge of the other.
    • Or that one giveth too much to his kin.
    • When one spendeth privily the common goods.
  • ...
    Of the patri∣mony of the crucifixe.
    • In taking more than of necessity.
    • Vnworthily and where it appertaineth not to be.
    • Spending it in evill usage.
• ...
  The x. branch of Covetise. Taking gifts uniustly.
  • ...
    To do hurt.
    • And for to bear domage unto other.
    • In accusing other wrongfully
    • Or sometime accusing for a iust cause.
  • ...
    To cause dis∣honesty.
    • As for to make treason or conspiration.
    • To make immundicity and dishonest things.
    • Or in taking both the adverse parties.
  • ...
    To sell iustice.
    • To the end to do his particular profit.
    • Hasting iustice, and to wrong him that hath right.
    • Deferring to do right to him it longeth to.
• ...
  The xi. branch of Covetise. Having too much.
  • ...
    Getting over∣much
    • By violence done for friends, or for silver.
    • Or by usury uniustly common to.
    • Or by frauds and deceptions acquired.
  • ...
    Withholding overmuch.
    • To the end they may be more honored and dread.
    • To the end to have the more their delights.
    • Or to have more possessions than other.
  • ...
    Sorrowing 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they can not get.
    • For envy of them that be ••icher than he.
    • By delighting him in riches.
    • For fear to have scarcity of good.
• ...

• ...
  The xii. branch of Covetise. Spending abundantly.
  • ...
    Things iustly gotten.
    • Giving uniustly not caring to whom.
    • Leesing disordinately the goods they have.
    • Abusing and foolish using they know well.
  • ...
    Things un∣iustly gotten.
    • In retaining them against conscience.
    • Doing alms with rapine and usury.
    • Spending them in carnalities.
  • ...
    Things not being his.
    • In approprying them to his singular usage.
    • Or approprying them to the usage of other.
    • Spending them superfluously on other persons.
• ...
  The xiii. branch of Covetise. Fraud.
  • ...
    In forecast∣ings.
    • By promises that they may receive.
    • By threatnings in like wise.
    • Or by sweet words,
  • ...
    Being double
    • Shewing fair semblance for the good of other.
    • Or by such semblant diffame other.
    • Or by fair semblant to hurt other.
  • ...
    Procuring e∣vil.
    • To him that weeneth thou art his friend,
    • To him thou knowest to be thine enemy.
    • Or indifferently to his friend or enemy.
• ...
  The xiv. branch of Covetise. False compunction
  • ...
    Evil recko∣ning.
    • Of that they owe to other iustly.
    • Of that which is ought by any ways.
    • Or that which is ought to other than him.
  • ...
    When they do know it & yeild it not.
    • For dread to yeeld it, or to be noted.
    • For shame they have to do it.
    • For avarice and love of retaining.
  • ...
    Consenting to evill, and do it not.
    • Holding his peace of that he knoweth.
    • Doing help to him that misreckoneth.
    • Willing to hinder him that is misreckoned.
• ...
  The xv. branch of Covetise. Leasing.
  • ...
    For merriness
    • For covetise to please.
    • For pleasance that they have of leasing.
    • Lightly to swear for they know not.
  • ...
    To make o∣ther to win.
    • Hiding that hurteth none ne helpeth other.
    • Sometime that it befor temporall goods.
    • Sometime to prove any person.
  • ...
    Fraudulently.
    • That profiteth sometime, and sometime noyeth.
    • That profiteth to none, and noyeth to some.
    • In the doctrin and promise of religion▪
• ...

• ...
  The xvi. branch of Covetise. Swearing.
  • ...
    The members of God.
    • In contemning God and his Saints.
    • For to shew that he is fierce.
    • Or that they take pleasure to do iniury to God.
  • ...
    Oftentimes.
    • By evill custome to swear often.
    • For pleasure that they have to swear.
    • For contemptment of him they swear.
  • ...
    Incautely.
    • Not taking heed what they swear.
    • Doing ill to verify that they swear for.
    • Not considering that oathes should be kept.
• ...
  The xvii. branch of Covetise. Forswearing.
  • ...
    By words.
    • Dolorously to deceive and beguile.
    • Vnwisely of that they know not.
    • Willingly of what they know not.
  • ...
    By faith inter∣posed.
    • In receiving any of the sacraments of the Church▪
    • In the false things that be lawfull.
    • Or in things that be not lawfull.
  • ...
    by touching of things made.
    • Swearing untruly in will to deceive other.
    • Or swearing truth, weening to swear false.
    • Or that sweareth false weening it to be true.
• ...
  The xviii. branch of Covetise. False witnesse.
  • ...
    That thing which they know not.
    • Bearing witnes of the thing they know not.
    • Witnessing the thing wherein they be ignorant.
    • Dissembling to be ignorant of they know not.
  • ...
    The thing that they do know.
    • For praise they have or ought to have.
    • For love of him for whom they be witnesse.
    • For malice that they will not say the truth.
  • ...
    The thing that they ween to know.
    • For false opinion they have of the thing.
    • Say the thing is true, and know it not.
    • Not inquiring for the truth, and may well.
• ...
  The xix. branch of Covetise. Plays.
  • ...
    Which be de∣fended.
    • As plays made by enchantment.
    • Dishonesties in provoking to dishonesty.
    • Or the which may greatly noy.
  • ...
    That be peril∣lous.
    • For pleasance of himself to please other.
    • By accustomance to make such plays.
    • Or in hope to have winning to do such plays.
  • ...
    With persons not appertai∣ning.
    • A lay man to play with a religious.
    • Or a lay man with a Priest or Clerk.
    • Or with any man of penance.
• ...

• ...
  The xx. branch of Covetise. Being vagabond.
  • ...
    For to seek ways for to be idle.
    • Feigning themselves and be not.
    • Doing such fantasie without necessity.
    • Or in so doing for to deceive other.
  • ...
    To be idle.
    • Among such as travell and labour.
    • Or among them feigning to be sick and are whole.
    • Or shewing themselves more sick than they be.
  • ...
    To obtemper their will.
    • In sustaining things sharp to sustain.
    • Deceiving by feigned words or by envy.
    • Weening to live without any thing that is need∣full

Here endeth the branches and small spraies of the sinne of Covetise, and here followeth the five branches of Gluttony, each of them to follow other in order, as to seek delicate meats, greedinesse, delicious dressing, eating with∣out hour, to make excesse. Out of the which five branches springeth and groweth small spraies to the number of xlv. the which bringeth every man and woman that planteth them in the arbor of their bodies unto delectation, unto the kitchen of infernall gulf, there to be fed and made satiate with the Devill the chief cook of the kitchen of hell.

• ...
  The first branch of Gluttony. seeking delicate meats.
  • ...
    For the good savour.
    • Against the profit of the soul.
    • Against the health of the body.
    • Against the health of both together.
  • ...
    For the great novelty.
    • For novelty that it is delicious.
    • Eating fruits because they were good and ripe.
    • By compositions of the conditions required.
  • ...
    In divers ap∣parelling.
    • By customance, so well to dresse it.
    • By lightnesse to be over-abundant without need.
    • By affection and pleasure that they take.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Gluttony Greedinesse.
  • ...
    In appetiting.
    • Meats more precious than longeth for them.
    • Mean meats and be not content with them.
    • Lesse meats than the state where they be requ••red
  • ...
    Too much de∣lighting.
    • In being curious to fill his belly.
    • Not serving God for filling of his wombe.
    • Eating too often without keeping any hour.
  • ...
    To much filling them.
    • As much as they may devour meats.
    • When he may fill him and not being content.
    • Not parting to the poor such meat as they have.
• ...

• ...
  The iii. branch of Gluttony. Delicious dressing·
  • ...
    By divers mā∣ners.
    • For to satisfy all his desires.
    • Not refusing to his belly any thing it desireth.
    • Not refusing any evill appetite.
  • ...
    Or exquisitely.
    • By art otherwise than other maketh.
    • By study how well that be difficil to do.
    • By labour and pain that they take to dresse them.
  • ...
    Condignly.
    • Needfull by divers manners of matters.
    • Delicious for the sweet and fragrant savors.
    • Sumptuous▪ not caring for any cost.
• ...
  The iiii. branch of Gluttony. Eating without hour.
  • ...
    Out of time.
    • Before a lawfull hour, and without necessity.
    • Or after, when the lawfull hour is past.
    • Or what hour it be, against commandement.
  • ...
    Many times.
    • What thing thou appetitest to eat.
    • Manifestly▪ that other may know it.
    • Or secretly, when thou onely wilt.
  • ...
    Vnlawfully.
    • As on fasting days to eat flesh.
    • In place, as eating in the Church.
    • As meat, as eating forbidden things.
• ...
  The v. branch of Gluttony. To make excesse.
  • ...
    In quantity of meats.
    • Eating more than is needfull.
    • Eating so much that it grieveth to soul and body.
    • Doing domage under colour of sicknesse.
  • ...
    In over deer meats.
    • Not caring what they cost if they be delectable.
    • Over delicious, and therefore more dear.
    • Dispraising meats of light price.
  • ...
    Vsing other mens tables.
    • For lechery and licorousnesse.
    • For company that they may eat the more.
    • For to fulfill the better their appetite.

Here endeth the branches and small spraies of Gluttony, and hereafter followeth the v. branches and spraies of Lechery, as they follow and ensue one after another, the which be these, Lechery, Immundicity, not giving the debt, abusing of his five wits, and Superfluity: out of the which bran∣ches, issueth and groweth many other small branches and spraies, to the number of xlv. The which branches if they be fixed and set in the inward delight of a man or woman, will make them grow to the eternall perdition both of body and soul.

• ...
  The first branch of Letchery. Letchery.
  • ...
    Fornication.
    • With all women married and widdows.
    • With a maiden yet being a virgin.
    • With common women, or them that are corrupt.
  • ...
    Adultery.
    • When a man companieth with other than his wife.
    • Or women with other than their husbands.
    • Or that they be both in marriage.
  • ...
    Excesse.
    • With man or woman of their linage.
    • With any men or women of their affinity.
    • Or that the one party be of religion.
• ...
  The ii. branch of Letchery. Immundicity.
  • ...
    Of thought.
    • Long delectation of thinking of Letchery.
    • Giving consent to such delectation.
    • Inforcing him to accomplish his will by work.
  • ...
    Of body.
    • Pollution by night by too much eating and drinking
    • By habitation or company of women.
    • Evill cogitation to accomplish such work.
  • ...
    Of both toge∣ther.
    • Moving or touching the flesh by delectation.
    • Accomplishing work and of will naturally.
    • Or any wise not naturally.
• ...
  The iii. branch of Letchery. Not giving the debt.
  • ...
    For hate.
    • When they love other than their party.
    • When they know that they be not loved of their par∣ty.
    • Or they are despightfull and rigorous.
  • ...
    For to shew travelling.
    • For they fear the infernall pains.
    • For dread to have poverty.
    • For fear of labor that they have of nourishing.
  • ...
    For abomina∣tion.
    • Some have abomination in that they be accustomed.
    • Or for immundicity of the work.
    • Whē any dispraise or hate the company of his party.
• ...
  The iv. branch of Letchery. Abusing thy five wits.
  • ...
    Exposing them∣selves in perill.
    • Sometime by reason of some persons.
    • And other times danger of the place.
    • And other seasons by reason of the time.
  • ...
    Not drawing from it.
    • Of the work when they know it is naught.
    • From the perill, and know it is dangerous.
    • Or for they provoke to such work in perill.
  • ...
    Delighting them in it.
    • In the work and sin of the flesh.
    • Or desire and will to accomplish it.
    • Or in thought and memory to have done it.
• ...

• ...
  The v. branch of Letchery. Superfluity.
  • ...
    In clothing.
    • In Iewels, rings, signets, and ouches.
    • In preciousness of gowns, girdles, and clothing.
    • In the composition or fashion newly gotten.
  • ...
    By delights.
    • By wantonnesse of children playing or being idle.
    • By delication of their body taking all their eases.
    • In doing all that the heart desireth.
  • ...
    By expence.
    • Spending largely for the praise of the world.
    • Giving where it appertaineth not to give.
    • For his delights hath spent too much of his goods.

Here endeth the branches of all the seven deadly sinnes as they be afore rehearsed, with all the small branches. Also shewing how three commeth of the great branches each by himself. And out of them three groweth ix. and in every branch hath small spraies springing out of them. So there is no man or woman living, but he sinneth venially, as it is written, Septies in die cadit j••stus. Lo if the righteous man do sin seven times a day by veniall sinnes, then we wretched sinners how oft do we sinne in a day? God wot, full often. But yet for veniall sinne is many remedies. Also for deadly sin is few remedies, and but four specially, as Confession, Con∣trition, Satisfaction, and Penance. But the first is, thou must be sorry for the sinnes. Secondly to make a meek confession. Thirdly, do satisfaction. And fourthly, perform thy penance adioyned by thy confessor, for penance is debt that we must pay to God for sinne committed, and therefore never look to have forgiveness of thy sinnes without repentance. And sinne is perillous afore the Lord Iesus Christ, for three manner of reasons. The first▪ hee giveth no warning when he smiteth thee. The second, for as he findeth thee, so he will iudge thee. The third, when thou art dead, remedy is past and gone.

CHAP. VIII. Here followeth the pains of hell comminatories of sinnes, to punish the sins as Lazarus recounted after that he was risen, as he had seen in the parts infer∣nall, as it appeareth by these figures ensuing one after another.

[illustration]

OVr Saviour and redeemer Iesu Christ, a little before his blessed passion, being in Bethany, entred into the house of a man named Simon, for to take his corporall refection: And as he was sitting at the table with his Apostles & Disciples, there being Lazarus brother to Mary Magdalen and Martha, the which our Lord had raised from death to life, the which thing Simon doubted, and praied our Lord for to command Lazarus to shew afore the assistants what he had seen in the other world: and our Lord gave him leave to speak. And then the said Lazarus recounted how that he had seen in the parts infernal of hell, many great and intollerable pains, whereas sinfull men and women were pained. First of pride, and consequently of all the seven deadly sinnes, each pain by himself.

FIrst said Lazarus, I have seen in hell wheels right high, set on an hill, the which was to look on in maner of mils, incessantly turning about by great impetuosity, roaring and whirling as it were thunder. And the wheles were fixed full of hookes and cramp••irons of yron and steel, and on them were hanged and turned the proud men and women for their pride, with their Prince, cap∣tain, and master, Lucifer.

[illustration]

PRide among all other sinnes, is a king, a captain, and master: and as a king hath a great company of people, in the same ma∣ner hath pride a great company of vices. And as a king keepeth that which is his, in like wise doth pride keep the proud folke that be in his iurisdiction. Great sign of reprobation it is to persevere long in pride. Pride then is a sin that displeaseth God above all other sinnes, as much as humility pleaseth him among vertues. And there is no sinne that maketh a man more semblable to the Devill than pride doth. For the proud man will not be as other men, but he must be as the Pharisie with the devil. And for that the proud man wil inhance him∣self above other men▪ the devil doth with him as the Crow having a hard nut in her bil, the which she may not crack, she beareth it up a hie in the air, and then letteth it fall upon a stone whereon it breaketh, and then she des∣cendeth and eateth it. In like wise the devil raiseth the proud man and woman for to let them fall in the hard pains of hell. As much difference is

between pride and humility, as the chaffe and the corn, for the chaffe is light and mounteth high, and the wind carrieth it about, and so is lost, and the corn which is heavy abideth low on the ground, and is gathered up & put in garners of the farmer, and is kept for the common profit, and the chaffe is burnt, lost, and devoured of beasts. And in this wise are the proud people raised and enhansed through the entisement of the fiend of hell, and then fall down by the moist rain of death, which maketh them heavy, and causeth them to tumble by the strength of their superbious blasts into the furnace everlasting, and there to be burnt and devoured with the horrible beasts of hell. Secondly, said Lazarus, I have seen in hell a floud frozen as ice, wherein the envious men and women were plunged unto the navel, and then suddenly came over them a right cold and a great wind, that greeved, and pained them right sore, and when they would evite and eschue the wonderfull blasts of the wind, they plunged into the water with great shouts and crys lamentable to hear.

[illustration]

These be the envious People.

ENvy is dolour and sorrow of the heart at the Felicity and prosperity of other, the which sin is soveraignly cursed, for that is it contrary to Charity, that is sove∣raign head of all vertues, whereby it is great sign of reprobation, for by it the fiends know them that shall be damned, as Charity is sign of salvation, and whereby God knoweth who shall be saved. Envious people be fellows unto the Devill. For if so be that an envious man do win, then he is very glad, and if he lose, he is evill angry with them. Envious men be so infect and corrupt, that good odors to them stinketh, and sweet things unto them seem soure, in like wise is the good name and prosperity of other, but stinking things, and soure to them be sweet, the which be vi∣ces, reproaches, adversities and evil fortunes, that they know or hear said of other. The envious folk seek their wealth in the adversity of other, as when of the harm of other, they seek the good in reioycing them, but with this they be not yet satisfied, but of a new they be tormented, for they have not such ioy without displeasure and affliction of the heart, whereby they be tormented, for hee that seeketh his wealth in the adversity of another, is like to him that seeketh the fire in the bottome of a water, or looketh for wool on an Vrchins back, the which things be but follies and abusions. Envy is but the goods and felicitys of this world, for the cursed sinne of Envy may not ascend into Heaven. It is a sinne difficil to heal, for it ta∣keth root and is fixed in the heart secretly, wherefore it is hard and impos∣sible to be done away by medicine, wherefore with great pains is any made whole that is infected with it. The envious mens tongues be likned unto a three-edged sword, that hurteth and cutteth three manner of ways, The first, he hurteth and woundeth his own soul. The second, him that he telleth his tale unto, and thirdly, hee slayeth him by whom he telleth his cursed tale.

Thus endeth Envy, and followeth the History of Wrath.

Wrath.

THirdly said Lazarus, I have seen in Hell, a great Cave tenebrous and obscure, full of tables like Butchers stalls or great butchery, whereas irefull men and women were thorow pierced with trenching knives, and sharpe glaives, and with long spears pierced their bodys, wherewith the most horrible and fearfull butchers of hell hewed, and betrenched them with their glaves and knives, impitiously without ceasing.

[illustration]

AS peace maketh the Conscience of a man to be the dwelling-place of God, so cursed wrath maketh it the habitation of the Devil. Wrath efisceth and leeseth the eye of reason, for in a wrathfull man reason is banished: there is nothing keepeth so much the image of God in man, as sweetnesse, peace, & love, for Almighty God will be there where peace & concord is, but wrath chaseth them from man, so that our Lord may h••ve no abiding; the wrathfull man is like to a demoniack, the which hath 〈◊〉〈◊〉 devil within him, causing him to torment and strive with himself, foaming at the mouth, and gnashing with his teeth, for the intollerable pain the enemy doth unto him. In lik•• wise the wrathfull man is tormented by wrath, & doth oftentimes worse than the demoniack, for without patience they beat the one with the other, say∣ing iniurys, reproaches, villanys & give themselves to the devel body & soul,

and say and do many unlawfull and domageable things By wrath somtime the Devill getteth an whole generation or all a country. When wrath is set, then commeth noyse, and then vengeance, that destroieth and loseth all▪ the which hapneth sometime through one wrathfull man, as an irefull does the which moveth & putteth strife among other. The fisher troubleth the water that the fish may not see his net, to the end that they may go therein and be taken: In like sort the Devil troubleth a man by wrath, to the end that he know not the harm that he committed by his wrathfull heart & courage.

FOurthly said Lazarus, I have seen in hell an horrible hall dark and tene∣brous wherein was a great multitude of serpents big and small, wheras slothfull men and women were tormented with bitings and stingings of venemous worms, the which peirced them thorow in divers parts of their bodies wounding them to the heart with unextinguishible pain.

[illustration]

Of Slothfull people.

SLoth is tristesse of spirituall goods, that should be or∣dained to God, wherfore they love to serve God as they ought to do with heart and mouth, and by good opera∣tion, who that will love God, ought to know him to be the Redeemer and Saviour of all goodnesse that wee have had and received every day, knowledging our selves sinners. Great folly it is when by sloth in the time of this breviate life we gather not goods for the life eternal. But in these days many be slothfull to do well, and diligent to do evill, so that if they were diligent to do well as they be to do evill, they were right happy: also sloth is the beginner of sin, and a great enemy to God, for he letteth men and women to serve God, and to know their maker and redeemer, and sender of all goodnesse that they have here, they be great fools, that be so slothfull here in this little time of this short life, that will gather no goods to bring the soul to everlasting life: But now adays people be slothfull in doing of good, and full diligent to evil, and if they were as diligent to do good as evill, they were full of grace. Now hee that will think as after his death is not wise for then he shal have but the good deeds that he hath done in his life before▪ then shall he sorrow and plain of the time that hee hath lost by sloth, and shall sorrow that he did no good deeds when he had time and space here in this world.

Here endeth Sloth, and followeth the History of Covetise.

FIftly said Lazarus, I have seen in the infernall parts a great number of wide cauldrons, and kettles, full of boy∣ling lead and Oyle, with other hot metals molten, in the which were plunged and dipped the covetous men and women, for to fulfill and replenish them of their insatiate covetise.

[illustration]

The Covetous Men and Women.

COvetise is a great sin, and wicked in the sight of God. For the covetous man imagineth more to get a peny, than the love of God, and had rather lose God than one half penny: for oftentimes for a little thing he lieth and forsweareth himself, and sinneth deadly. The faith, hope, and charity that should be in God, the covetous man putteth in his riches. First faith, for he beleeveth to have such things the which be necessary for him, sooner for his goods, than by the gift of God, as if that God might not help him, or as if that God had no solicitude of his servants.

Also the covetous man hath hope to have the more ioy and consolations by his riches than God may give them. And a••so the covetous man set∣teth all his heart on his goods, and not on God, and thus the Covetous man and woman have their charity in their rich chests, coffers and bags. The covetous man hath his heart more on his goods than on God: there as is the heart, there is their love, and love is charity, and so covetous men have their hearts on their goods. The Covetous man sinneth gathering his goods, and in using it evill, and in loving it overmuch, and sometimes better than he doth God; the covetous man is taken in the net of the devil, by the which he looseth everlasting life for small temporall goods▪ as the bird doth go into the pitfall for a worm, and loseth his life: and as the mouse is taken in a fall or trap, and loseth his life for a little bakon. The covetous men and women bee like curs or dogs, the which do keep cartion, and when their bellies be full they lye down by it and keep away the birds that they may not eat, but dieth for hunger for fault that the curres have too much. In like wise the covetous men with-hold the goods that poor men may get none, and letteth them dye for hunger. and holdeth them in their subiection, and the devill holdeth the rich men in his sub∣iection that doth the poor men wrong.

Thus endeth the pain for the Covetous men.

Here followeth the vi. pain of Hell.

THe vi. pain said Lazarus that I have seen (in Hel is in a vale) a floud foul and stinking at the brim, in which was a table with towels right dishonestly, whereas gluttons be fed with toades and other vene∣mous beasts, and had to drink of the water of the said floud,

[illustration]

THe throat is the gate of the body of man, so when enemies will take the castle, if they may win the gate they will lightly have all the castle: So when the devill may win the throat of a man by gluttony, easily he will have the re••nant, and enter into the body accompanied of sins, for the gluttons consent unto al vi∣ces. And for this cause it were necessary to have a good guard at the gate, that the devil enter not. For whē one holdeth a horse by the bridle, he may lead him where he will, so doth the devill the gluttenous man where him list. The servant that is over easily nourished rebelleth oft against his ma∣ster, the belly over filled with meat & drink is rebell to the soul, so that it wil do no good operations. By gluttony many be dead which might have lived longer, & so they have bin homicides of themselves, for excess of too much eating and drinking corrupteth the bodies and engendereth sick∣nesses,

the which often abridgeth and shortneth the lives. And they that nourish well the flesh, prepare meats for worms, and so the glutton is cook of worms. A man of worship would be ashamed for to be a cook of a great Lord, more ashamed should he be, to be a cook for worms. They that live after the desire of the flesh, live after the rule of the Swine, in eating with∣out measure like an unreasonable beast. This is the hogge as it were an Abbot over gluttonous people, of whom they hold their order and regule, whereby they bee constrained to keep them in their cloister, that is, in the Tavern, and Ale-houses. And like wise as the hog their Abbot lyeth in a rotten dunghill or in the miry puddle, so do they alwaies lie in the stinking infection of gluttony, till they be drunken and without wit.

The vii. pain said Lazarus, I have seen a field ful of deep wells replenish∣ed with fire and sulphur, whereout issued smoak thick and contagious, wherein all lecherous persons were tormented incessantly with devils.

[illustration]

OF all the vii. deadly sinnes, Letchery pleaseth most unto the Devill, for it filleth and corrupteth both the body and the soul together, and by Letchery the Devil winneth two souls at once, and many letcherous persons wil avant themselves, and say, that they may not have their full desire and lust of that sinne. Letcherous men and women bee more deformed and ougly than the devill in the superaboundance of that sinne. He is a foolish marchant that makes a bargain of the which hee knoweth right well that hee shall lose thereby, and repent him of his bargain again. In like man∣ner of wise, each Letcherous man hath great pain, and spendeth his goods and his understanding to fulfil and accomplish his lusts & delights, and after repenteth him of his expence, and yet the worst is he is in daun∣ger of his soul till he be repentant, and do sufficient penance. The letche∣rous men and women living bee tormented with three infernall pains, as heat, stink, and remorse of their Conscience: For they be hot by con∣cupiscence, they be stinking by their immundicity, for such sinne is all stink∣ing and maculateth the body and soul, where all other sinnes file but the soul.

Also they be not without remorse of conscience for the offence they have done to God, Letchery is the pit of the devill, wherein he maketh sinners to fall, to the which many helpeth the devil to cast themselves in it, when willingly they go to the brimme, knowing that the devill will cast them in; good it is not to hearken to women, better it is, not to behold them, and much better it is not to touch them. To this sinne belongeth foul words, villain songs, dishonest touchings, the which abhorreth not bawds, har∣lots, whores, and such as frequenteth and persevereth in the same.

Thus endeth the seven deadly sinnes, figured each by himself, like as Lazarus had seen in the parts infernall.

CHAP. IX. Hereafter followeth the third part of the Kalender and Compost of Shepheards, salutary Science, and Garden of vertues.

[illustration]

WHo that will have on a peece of earth great abundance of fruit, first they ought to take away all things that be noysome, and after labour it well, and then sow good seeds: In like wise a man should labour and cleanse his conscience of all his sins, labour by holy meditations, and sow vertues and good ope∣rations, for to gather fruit of everlasting life.

Then sith that here before hath been spoken of vices rudely and lightly, now it behoveth hereafter to speak of vertues in the third part of this present book, the which shall be as a little garden, pleasant, full of trees & flowers, in the which the contemplative person may sport & play, & by good ensignments gather sundry vertues, and edify himself in good exercise, wherewith his soul shall bee enormed and ordained after his spouse Iesus Christ, when he shall come to visit and dwell with him. In the beginning of the which part shall be the Orason dominicall of our Lord, with the decla∣ration the better to understand it, and the said part shall contain six parts.

The first part shall be the declaration of the said prayer, the second of the salutation Angelike that Gabriel made to Mary when shee conceived

her child Iesus, the third shall be of the twelve articles of our faith, the iv. shall be of the ten Commandements of the Law, the v. shalbe of the field of vertues. For the first, ye ought to know that by the orison of our Lord, that is the Pater noster, when wee say it wee demand of God suffisance of all things necessary, for salute and help of our souls and of our bodys, not only for us, but for all other, and for all this cause we ought to have the said orison in great contemplation, & say it with great devotion unto God And unto young people it should be taught and said to them, for though they understand it not, yet it profiteth them to have the kingdom of heaven and they say it in perfect love and charity. In the Pater noster we ask seven petitions, by each petition we may understand seven other things, as the seven Sacraments of holy Church, the seven gifts of the holy ghost, the se∣ven armours of iustice spirituall. The seven vertues principall that wee should exercise. The seven works of mercy bodily. The seven works of mercy ghostly. The seven deadly sinnes, that we should dread. The declaration is this, Our father which art in heaven, thy name be made ho∣ly. In this petition we ask of God our Father to be his Sons, for other∣wise we cannot be called his Sons, nor he our Father, and that his name may be made by us more holy than any other thing, wherefore we receive the Sacrament of baptism, without that man may not be made the Son of God, and to receive the vertue of meeknesse against pride, and then to cloth the naked and help the needy both bodily and ghostly. The second is thy kingdome come to us, in this petition. Insomuch the name of God may not be perfectly hallowed of us in this world, we ask his realm, in the which perfectly we shall hallow it, for to that kingdome we be very heirs, This petition is the sacrament of priesthood by the which we are taught to good works, and the gift of the holy ghost is the gift of understanding, for to understand and desire the kingdome of heaven, and we arm us with the helm of largess against covetous. The third petition is, thy will be done in earth as it is in heaven, for it is the perfect will of God that his will should be fulfilled, that is his commandement: by this petition we make obeisance to God in our hearts when we desire to do his will, by this is understood the sacrament of marriage, by the which we avoid fornication and the gift of counsell of the holy ghost, for to order our obeysance verita∣bly, and so we arm us with the armour of salvation against Envy. The fourth petition is our daily bread give us this day. Here we ask of God to be sustained with materiall bread for our bodies, and spirituall bread for our souls, that is the bread of life the body of Iesus Christ the which wee receive by faith, in mind of his passion. The gift of the holy ghost is strength to be faithfull in our belief, take we the sword of patience against the sinne of ire, and visit the sick men bodily, and use vertue of temperance against wrath▪ The fift petition is forgive us our sinnes, as we forgive all men, for trust well, he that will not forgive for the love of God, God will never for∣give

him his sinnes. And these three petitions following we ask of God to be delivered from all evill, as of the sin that we have done deadly, and by these wee ask of God to be assoiled, and to give us pardon by his mercy, by the which we understand the sacrament of penance and forgiveness of sinne, the holy ghosts gift is science for to understand the works of mer∣cy, and to escape sin.

And so clothe us with lightnes against covetise, & comfort poor prisoners and give good counsell to them that ask and need it, and take the vertue of faith against covetise. The vi. petition is, suffer us not to be overcome in temptation by the second evill that is done, but it may happen and we fall by the way of temptation. Here we ask of God to be stedfast in the faith, & that we may gladly do good works in the vertue of hope and strength to do good deeds, and to withstand temptation, to the which profiteth to us the sacrament of confirmation, which giveth to us the knowledge of God by the vertue of verity. The gift of the holy ghost, & so take we the spear of soberness against gluttony, & comfort Pilgrims by vertue of hope. The vii. petition is to deliver us from evill. Amen. The third evill, is evill of pain, that sinners may have if they serve not God, & by this petition we ask that we may be delivered from all pains, and saved in Paradice, unto this say we all. Amen. By these we ask, so it be done as we desire. By the which we receive the sacrament of the latter annointing, which giveth us the sure way of salvation, the gift of the holy ghost is dread of iudgements of God, and gird us with the girdle of chastity against letchery, and bury we them that be dead bodily, and pray for our enemies ghostly, get in us the vertue of charity, and eschue the sin of letchery.

Thus endeth the Salutary science of the garden of vertues.

CHAP. X. Hereafter followeth another de∣claration of the Pater noster.

[illustration]

OVr Father, right marvellous in his creation, sweet and loving, rich of all goods that be in heaven, mirror of trinity, crown of iocundity, and treasure of felicity. Holy be thy name, and sweet as hony in our mouth; thou art the melodious harp that causeth devotion to sound in our ears▪ and to have it continually by the desire of our hearts. Thy realm come to us, in the which we shall be ever in ioy and rest without trouble, and sure never to lose it. Thy will be done in earth as it is in heaven: as to love all that thou lovest, and to hate all that thou hatest, and that wee keep evermore thy commandements. Our daily bread give us to day that is to say, bread of doctrin, bread of penance, and bread for our bodily sustentation. And forgive us all our sins, that we have done against thee, against our neigh∣bours, and against our self: Semblably as we forgive other that have of∣fended us, by words, in our bodies, or our goods. And suffer not that we be overcome in temptation, that is to say, as by the devill, the world, and the flesh: But deliver us from all evill works ready done, and also them for to come.

Here followeth the History of the Pater noster row.

[illustration]

OVR Father which art in Heaven, hallowed be thy name. Let thy kingdome come. Thy will be done, as well in earth as it is in heaven. Give us this day our daily bread. And forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive our trespassers. And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evill. For thine is the kingdome, and the power, and the glory, for ever and ever Amen.

IN the story here before, sheweth the simple people how this holy praier the Pater noster should be said to God the father, & to God the son, & God the holy Ghost, & to none other. The which praier containeth and taketh all that be rightfully asked of God, & our

Lord Iesus Christ made it there, to the intēt that we should have more hope and devotion, and he made it on a time when he taught his Apostles, spe∣ally to make orison. And then the disciples said, Lord and master learn us to pray, and then our Lord opened his holy mouth and said to his Apo∣stles: when ye will make any prayers, after this maner as here follow∣eth, shall you begin, saying thus.

Our father which art in heaven, hallowed be thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done in earth as it is in heaven. Give us this day our dayly bread. And forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive them that tres∣passe against us, and let us not be led into temptation. But deliver vs from evill. Amen.

Hereafter followeth the salutation that the Angell Gabriel made to the glo∣rious Virgin Mary, with the greeting of the holy woman S. Elizabeth.

Haile Mary full of grace, our Lord is with thee.

Blessed art thou of all women, and bles∣sed be the fruit of thy wombe, Iesus.

[illustration]

Secondly, in the booke of Iesus, the Salutation is such.

Haile Mary full of grace, our Lord is with thee. Blessed be thou amongst all women, and blessed be the fruit of thy wombe, Iesus Christ, Amen.

The salutation of the Angel Gabriel.

[illustration]

IN this salutation is three mysteries. The first is the salutation that the Angell Gabriel made. The second is the loving com∣mendation that S. Elizabeth made, mother to S. Iohn Bap∣tist. The third is the supplica∣tiō that our mother holy church maketh. And they be the most fair words that we can say to our Lady: that is the Ave Ma∣ria, wherin we salute her, praise her, pray her, and speak to het. And therfore it is only said to her, and not to S. Katherine, nor to S. Margaret, nor to none other Saint. And if thou demaund how thou maist then pray to other saints, I say to thee, thou must pray as our mother holy Church praieth, in saying to Saint Peter, Holy S. Peter, pray for us. S. Thomas pray for us. That they may pray to God to give us grace, & he forgive us our sins. And that he give us grace to doe his will & penance, & keep his comman∣dements, & so we shall pray to the saints in heaven after the necessity that we have.

S. Peter, S. Andrew, S. Iames the great, S. Iohn, S. Thomas, S. Iames the lesse, S. Philip, S. Bartholomew, S. Matthew, S. Simon, S. Iude, and S. Matthias.

CHAP XI. Thirdly, in the book of Iesus is salutary science, and is the Credo which we ought to beleeve on pain of damnation.

[illustration]

I beleeve in God the fa∣ther almighty, maker of heaven and Earth, and in Iesus Christ his only Sonne our Lord. which was conceived of the holy Ghost, and suffered passion under Ponce Pilate, cruci∣fied, dead, and buried, went into hell, the third day rose from death, As∣cended into heaven and siteth on the right hand of God the Father,

[illustration]

And after shall come to iudge the quick and the dead. I beleeve in the holy Ghost, The Holy Catholick Church, the communi∣on of Saints, and re∣mission of sinnes. The rising of the flesh, The life everlasting, A∣men.

SAint Peter put the first article and said, I believe in God the Father almightie, creator of heaven and earth. Saint Andrew put to the second and said, I beleeve in Iesus Christ his onely son our Lord. Saint Iames the great put to the third, saying, I beleeve that he was conceived of the holy Ghost, born of the Virgin Mary. Saint Iohn put to the fourth, saying, I beleeve that he suf∣fered passion under Ponce Pilate, was crucified, dead and buried. Saint Thomas put to the fift, saying, I beleeve that he descended into hell, and the third day arose from death to life. Saint Iames the lesse put to the sixt, saying, I beleeve that he ascended into heavē, and sitteth on the right hand of God the father omnipotent. Saint Philip put to the seventh saying, I beleeve that after he shall come to iudge the quick and the dead. S. Bar∣tholomew put to the eight, saying, I beleeve in the holy Ghost. S. Matthew put to the ninth, saying I beleeve in the holy Church Catholike. S. Simon put to the tenth, saying, I beleeve the communion of saints and remission of sinnes Saint Iude put to the eleventh, saying, I beleeve the resurrec∣tion of the flesh. Saint Matthias put to the twelfth, saying, I beleeve the life eternall. Amen.

Here followeth the Creed as it ought to be said.

I Beleeve in God the father almighty creator of heaven & earth, And in Iesus Christ his only son our Lord. That was con∣ceived by the holy Ghost, born of the Virgin Mary. Sufferd passion under Ponce Pilate crucified, dead and buried, Descen∣ded into hel, and the third day arose from death. Ascended into heaven, and sitteth on the right hand of God the father omnipotent. And after shall come to iudge the quick and the dead. I beleeve in the holy Ghost. The holy Church Catholike. The communion of saints. Remission of sins: Resurrection of the flesh, and life eternall. Amen.

THis Creede was made & composed by the xii Apostles of our Lord, of the which every Apostle hath put to his Article, as is here above shewed in the Creed, as much of one part as of the other & our faith Catholike is cōtained in the said xii. Articles that is the begining of our health, without which none may be saved, ne do nothing that is agreeable to God; and faith ought to be at the heart by knowledge of God, In the mouth, by confession, and praysings to him in worke, by exercising of his commandements and good works, and the which sheweth them that so doth to have true faith and life, that is to say to save thē. And how will that faith in heart be good in the mouth also neverthelesse the best is that which lyeth in good works one doth, and is the same faith that lyeth in the heart and mouth, for there is but one faith, & one God. And this same Creed ought to be had and known of every man and womā having age competent & understanding of reason▪ and ought for to say it both in the morning & in the evening every day devoutly, for it is of

right great devotion. Therefore a good christian man assoon as he riseth from his bed, and is arrayed and clothed, kneeleth beside his bed or other where, and first blesseth him with the sign of the cross, and then saith Cre∣do in deum, or I beleeve in God the father almighty, as is above said. Then after, the Pater noster to God, and to our Lady the Ave Maria, and after∣ward recommends him to his good Angel, in making praier to him saying, My good Angell, I require thee to keep and govern me. In like wise when he goeth to rest at night. And so at the least twice in the day, at the morrow and in the evening.

CHAP. XII. Fourthly, In the book of Jesus, is the ten Commandements of the Law, that God gave to Moses on the Mount of Sinai, for to preach and to teach the people.

One God only thou shalt love and worship perfectly. By God in vain thou shalt not swear, nor by that he made truly. The Sundays thou shalt keep in serving God devoutly. Father and Mother thou shalt honor, and shalt live longly. Manslayer thou shalt not be indeed willingly. Letcherous thou shalt not be of thy body, ne consentingly. No mans good shalt thou not steal, nor withhold falsely. False witnesse thou shalt not hear in any wise lyingly. The work of the flesh desire, but in marriage only. The goods of other covet not to have them uniustly.

Fourthly, the said commandements ought to be observed & accomplished upon pain of everlasting damnation of body and soul, of them have the usage of reaso•• or without the knowledge of them convenable we may not eschue and fly the sins, nor have knowledge of them, nor confesse us ve∣ritably of our sins; wherefore the ignorance of the common by desire, affec∣tion, or other malice, excuseth not them that know them not, but accuseth and condemneth them, and therfore our Lord commandeth them to be had in meditation in their houses and without, in sleeping and in waking, and in all works. And thus we beholden and bound to keep them, so that he which never heard speak of them, and thinketh not to do evill, if he tres∣passe in one willingly, and dieth soon after, he should be damned perdura∣bly. By this it appeareth that ignorance of the commandements be peril∣lous, wherefore each man and women study for to know them, & learn thē such as thou must give a reckoning for, as your children, servants, & other.

[illustration]

[illustration]

The five Commandements of the Church.

FIftly, in the book of Iesus been the five Commandements of the holy Church, which ought to be kept of all them that have usage of reason, after as they be of power. And it is said after that they be of power, for if the man or woman that may not confesse them, or receive at Easter, or keep the holy day commanded, or that at the fast of obligation when they have will to do them▪ and bee lawfully letted, sinne not. But every man and woman keep them, that A∣varice, Sloth, or desire to see many pleasures, as dances, plaies or iuglers, or dispraising of our mother holy Church, be not cause they trespasse the commandement, to the end they run not in damnati••••▪ from the which keep us for the mercy of God. Amen.

Here is to be noted that the transgression of the Commandements of holy Church obligeth deadly sinne, and by continuance eternall damna∣tion, as doth the obligation of the commandements of the Law, of whom is spoken before. For they that hear the Priests reading the commande∣ments in the Church on the Sundays in the parochial service time, and accomplisheth the said Commandements, heareth God, and doth his will, but all that mispraiseth the Priest, and doth not their commandements af∣ter the ordinance of the Church, mispraiseth God, and sinneth mortally.

CHAP. XIII. Hereafter followeth of the man in the Ship, that sheweth the unstablenesse of the world.

[illustration]

Qui finem attendit Foelix, & qui bene vivit. Ergo quisquis ades precor hic, sta, perlege, pensa. Mortem praemetuens veniam pete, cortere plara. De reliquis cautus bene fac te crimine serva. Foelix qui potuit tam tutum tangere portum, Sed miser est quicunque sub peste gehenne. Vive mori presto munda sub mente quietis, Semita non virtus Deus optimus anchora portus.

GOd guide me right, that once I might Come to the port of peace, Mine exchange make, and return take, That mine enemies may cease. One me followed, would me have shallowed, In the gulf dangerous. With worldly glosse, he doth me tosse.

Among the waves perillous, On rases hollow some do me follow, Enemies me to take. A great number do smite me under, I doubt I shall not es••ape. The fiend with woe, the world also, My flesh doth me trouble, In wake and sleep to me they creep, Thus encreaseth my sorrow double. They bid me not spare, but buy their ware, As all worldly vanity. They say hope among for to live long, Thus do they cumber me. The world doth smile, me to beguile, And so doth the other two. Now must I seek, some me to keep, To save me from my foe. I have found one, even God alone, I need none other aid. That by his might put them to flight, And made them all afraid. He spake to me full courteously, And profered me full fair, If I do well, with him to dwell, In heaven to be his heir.

Versus.

NOs sumus in hoc mundo, sicut navis super mare, Semper est in periculo, semper timet accubare, Praevigilanti, nos oportet remigare, Ne bibamus de poculo dirae mortis & amarae. Esto homo res fragilis, curis oppressa, labore, Mortis, judicii, barathri, perplexa timore. Si virtus sola tutam dat ducere vitam, Virtus sola potest aeternam condere famam. Foelicem merita faciunt, non copia rerum. Grandia non ditant, ditat bene grandibus uti. Discite nunc mortalis, quam sint mortalia vana, Praecessere patres matres magnique parentes: Nos sequimur, paribus ad mortem passibus imus, Vnde superbimus, in terram, terra redimus.

[illustration]

Super non fueram, nec ero post tempore pauco, Millia nunc putrium quorum jam multa voluptas. Perdita fama silet, anima anxia forsitan ardet.

THe mortall man living in this world, is well compared to a ship on the sea, or on a perillous river, bearing rich marchandise, which if it come to the port where the marchant desireth, he shall be happy and rich. The ship as soon as it is entered into the sea, unto the end of her vo••age, night and day is in perill to be drowned or taken with enemies, for in the sea be pe∣rills without number. Such is the body of man living in the world, the marchandise that he beareth, is his soul, his vertues and good workes, the port or haven is death & paradise for the good, to the which who that goeth thither is soveraignly rich, the sea is the world full of sinnes: for who that assaieth for to passe it, is in perill to leese body & soul, and all his goods, & to be drowned in the sea of hell, frō the which God keep us, Amen.

CHAP. XIV. Here followeth the field of vertues.

IN walking furthermore in the field of vertues, & in the way of health, for to come to the tower of sapience, it necessarily beho∣veth to love God, for without the love of God none cā be saved, an•• who that will love him ought first to know him, for of his knowledge one commeth to his love, that is Charitie, the sove∣raigne of all vertues. They knowledge God and love him that keep his commandements, & they misknow him that do not so, to whom in the great necessity of their deceasing, and at the day of iudgment, shall misknow them, and say to them, I know ye not, nor wot not what ye be, go ye cursed out of my company. Knowledg we then God and love him, and if we will do thus, know we first our self, & by the knowledge of our self, we shall come to the knowledge and love of God, and the more wee know our self the better we shall know God, and if we be ignorant of our self, we shall have no knowledge of God. To this purpose we must note one thing and know seaven. The thing wee must note is this, whosoever knoweth himself, knoweth God, and shall not be damned, and who is knoweth not himself, knoweth not God, and shall not be saved: understand of them that have wit and discretion with lawfull age, of the which knowledge none is excused after he hath sinned deadly, for to say that he was ignorant. By this appeareth the ignorance of himself & of God right perillous. Deadly sin is beginning of all evill, & contrarily, knowledge of God, and of him∣self, is soveraign science and vertue, beginning of all goodnesse. The seven things we ought to have, been the xii. articles of the faith which wee ought to beleeve stedfastly. Also the petitions cōtained in the Pater noster, by the which we demand all things necessary for our health, and that we ought to

hope in him, also the commandements of the Law, and of the holy Church which ensigneth us what we should do, and what we should not do, and all things belonging to the same. Also if we be in the grace of our Lord, or not. And howbeit we may not know it certainly, neverthelesse wee may have some coniectures, which be good to know, and knowledge of GOD. Also knowledge of himselfe, by the which things we may come to the true love and charitie of God, to accomplish his commandements, and merit in the realme of heaven, wherein wee shall live perdurably. Of the iii. first is enough said, that is, to know the twelve articles of the faith, in the which lieth our faith and beleefe, and the things that we ought to demand of God be contained in the Pater noster, wherein our hope lyeth. Also the ten com∣mandements of the Law, and of holy Church, whereas charity is shewed in such as keep them, by probation of the love of God, and doe his comman∣dements and good works. Now will we speak of the other foure, and first of the vocation in which we be, which is the fourth thing that each man ought to know. Each man ought to know his vocation, & the things belonging to the same be iust and honest for his health, and rest of his con∣science.

A good shepheard ought to know the art of sheep-keeping, and to govern sheep, and lead them into pastures, and to heale them when they be sicke, and sheere them in season, to the intent, through his default no damage come to his master. In like wise hee that laboureth the corne, to know what ground were good for every manner of graine, and ought to till the earth, and when time is, to sow, weed, reape, and thresh, so that his Master may have no damage by him. Semblably a Sur∣gion ought to know how to comfort and heale such folkes, as hee hath charge of, without hiding of his art or Surgery. Consequently a Mar∣chant ought to know the utterance of his marchandise to others, with no more fraud than he would himself should have. Also an Advocate or a Proctor ought to know the rites and customes of places, that by their fault Iustice be not perverted. A Iudge also ought to know (both the par∣ties heard) who hath right and who hath wrong, and iudge equally after true Iustice. Also a Priest or a religious man ought to know their orders▪ and keep them, and above all things ought to know the law of God, and teach them unto the ignorant. And thus of all other vocations. For all them as know not their vocation be not worthy to be, and live in peril of their soules for their ignorance. The fift, that all men ought to know, is, if he have discretion and understanding, to know if he be in the grace of God or not. And how it be right difficile, for God only knoweth it, neverthelesse we may have coniectures that sheweth it, and sufficient for Shepheards and lay people to know, if they be in the love of the Lord, & if they have con∣iecture to be in it, therefore there ought none to repute themselves iust, but ought to humble themselves, & ask him mercy, as maketh sinners become

and none other. Principally we ought to know this science when we will receive the body of Iesus Christ. For who that receiveth his grace and good¦nes, receiveth his salvation, and who that receiveth him otherwise, recei∣veth everlasting damnation, of the which thing every man is iudge in himself of his owne conscience, and none other. The coniectures where∣by we may know if that we be in the grace of God or not. The first coniec∣ture is when we do travel for to clense our conscience of our faults by pe∣nance as much as if we laboured to get some great good, that wee be not culpable of any deadly sin done, or in will to doe, nor in any sentence, then it is good coniecturing to be in the grace of God. The second coniecture that sheweth in like wise to be in the grace of God is, when we bee more prompt and ready to good▪ observing and keeping the commandements of God, and doe all good workes that we should have accustomed▪ The third coniecture is, when wee hear gladly the word of God, as Sermons and good counsellers for our saluation. The fourth when we be sorry and con∣trite at our heart to have commised and done any sin. The fift is, when with good purpose and will of our selves, we persever to keep us from sin in time to come. These coniectures be they, whereby Shepheards and lay people know if they be in his grace or not, as much as in them is possible to know. The sixt thing that every man ought to know is God, for all men ought to know God, for to accomplish his will and commandement, by the which he would be loved with all thy heart, with all thy soul, and with all the force that we have, which we may not doe if we know him not, then who that would love God, ought to know him, and the more that they know him, the more they love him: wherefore hereafter shall be said how Shepheards and simple people doe know him. Shepheards and sim∣ple people for to have knowledge of God, of their possibility considering 3 things. The first is that they consider the right great riches of God his puissance, his soveraign dignity, his soveraign noblenesse, his sove∣raign ioy and blisse. The second is, for they consider the right noble, right great and marvellous operations and workes of our Lord God. And the third consideration is, for they consider the innumerable benefits that they have received of God, and that continually every day they receive of him, and by these considerations they come to his cognisance and know∣ledge. First to know God, Shepheards and lay people consider his great riches, plenteous abundance of the goodnesse that he hath, for all the treasures and riches of heaven and of the earth bee his, and all goodnesse he hath made, of the which he is fountaine, creator, and master, and di∣stributeth them largely unto every creature, and he hath no need of any o∣ther. Wherfore it behoveth to say that he is right rich. Secōdly he is right puissant, for by his great puissance hee hath made heaven, earth▪ and the sea, with all things contained in them, and might undoe them if it were his will, unto the which puissance all other be subiect, and tremble before

him for his great excellency. And who that would consider every work of God, should find enough to marvell on. By the first of these considera∣tiōs God is known to be right rich by gifts that he giveth to his friends: and by the second he is known right puissant, for to avenge him on his e∣nemies. Thirdly he is soveraignly worthie, for all the things of hea∣ven and earth oweth him honour, and reverence, as to their Creatour and him that made them, as wee see children honour father and mother of whom they be descended by a generation: and all things be descended of God by a creation, to whom ought to be given great reverence, and he is so worthie. Fourthly, hee is soveraignly noble, for who that is soveraign∣ly rich, puissant, and worthie, him behoveth to be soveraignlie noble, but none other but God hath riches, puissance, and dignity as he hath, wher∣fore of such nobles ought to be said that he is right noble. Fifthly he hath soveraign ioy, for he that is rich, puissant, worthie, and right noble, is not without soveraign ioy, and this ioy is full of all goodnesse, and ought to be our felicitie, to the which we hope to come. That is, to know and see God in his soveraign ioy, and gladnesse, for to have with him eternall ioy that ever shall endure. And this is the first consideration of GOD. that shepheards and other simple people ought to have. Secondly for to know God, considering his great noblenesse and marvellous workes, the boun∣ty and the beauty of the things that he hath made, for it is commonly said, one may know the workman by the work· Knowledge wee then the work of God, and knowledge we that his beauty & bounty shineth in the operations that he hath made, which if they bee fair and good, the work∣man that hath made them must needs bee fair and good without compa∣rison, more than any thing that he hath made. Be it considered of the hea∣vens and the things therein set, what noble and marvellous work, how may one consider their excellence & beauty. Bee it considered also as we may of the earth, the right noble & marvellous works of God, the gold, the silver, and all manner of metals & precious stones in it, the fruits that it beareth, the trees, the beasts that it sustaineth, and of the bountie that it nourisheth. Be it in like wise considered of the sea, the rivers, & the fish nou∣rished in them. The weather, the elements, the ayre, the winds, & the birds that flie in them, and all the usage and service of men. And consider the workeman that of his puissance hath made all, & by his sapience hath right well ordered his works, and governeth them by his great bounty, and by this manner we may know God, as shepheards and simple folkes in con∣sidering his work. Thirdly for to know God, consider the great benefits that we receive daily of him, which may not be numbred for their great multitude, nor spoken of for their noblenesse & dignity, albeit in their hearts be vi. principally noted. For the which another Shepheard giving prai∣ses to God, said in this manner. Lord God I know thou hast indued me with thy infinit benefits by thy great bounty. First the benefit of thy crea¦tion,

by the which thou madest me a reasonable man unto thy image and similitude, giving me body and soul, and raiment to clothe me. Lord thou hast given me my wits of nature, understanding for to govern my life, my health, my beautie, my strength, and my science for to get my living honestly, I yeeld to thee graces and great thankes. Secondly, Lord I know the goodnes of my redemption, how by thy misericordious pity thou boughtst me dearly by the affection of thy most precious bloud, paines, and torments, that for me thou hast suffered, & finally endured death, thou hast given me thy body, thy soul, and thy life, for to keep me from damnation, wherefore humblie I yeeld to thee graces and great thankes. Thirdlie, Lord I know the goodnesse of my vocation, how of thy great grace thou hast called me again, for to inherit thy eternall benediction, and also thou hast given unto me faith and knowledge of thine owne self, as baptism, and all the other sacraments that none intendment may comprize their no∣blenesse and dignity, & that so many times hath pardoned me of my sinnes. Lord I know that this is to mee a singular gift, that thou hast not given to them which have no knowledge of thee, whereof I am more beholding & humblie bound, I yeeld thee graces and thanks. Fourthly, Lord I know∣ledge that thou hast given this world and the things that be therein made for my service and use, the office, the benefit, and the dignity in the which I am, for sir I bear your similitude and image, which is reputed right wor∣thie & noble, whereof humbly I yeeld thee graces and thanks. Fiftly, Lord thou hast given me the skie and his fair ornaments, the Sun, the Moon, and the Starres, that the day and night serveth me, giving brightnes and light without to be recompenced by me, whereof I yeeld to thee graces and thanks. Sixtly, Lord I knowledge thou hast made Paradise readie for to give me, where I shal live with thee in ioyes without end, if I do thy wil and keep thy commandements, & also I knowledge thy other infinit good∣nes each day done to me by thy bounty, the which ensigneth me to know my God, my Saviour, and Redeemer, wherefore I humbly give thanks to thee. By these considerations Shepheards and simple people contempleth the bounty of God, and the benefits that they receive of him. And know we him, and be we not in great knowledge of his benefits, in yeelding thanks and praisings to him, and recompence of your goods in giving to poor folkes for his sake, for ingratitude is a villain sinne that much displeaseth God. The seventh, and the last thing that each man ought to know, is to know himself, for it is the best meanes for to come unto the knowledge of God, and for to make his salvation, so to know himself first. Divers folk know many things that know not themselves, to whom should profit more to know thēselves▪ than all things in the world. They that know the things of the world love them, seek them, and keep them, & know not, ne love, ne praise not, ne keep not, God in like wise, for they know him not. What profiteth man to win all the world & lose himself for to be damned?

Better it were for him to leese all the world, if it were his, if he knew him∣selfe to be saved. Shepheards say the needfull beginning of his salvation is to know himself, and contrariwise ignorance of himself is the beginning of damnation, anv of all evill that may befall unto him.

A question of a Master Shepheard to a simple shepheard, to weet, how he knew himself, and he said, Shepheard tell me how thou knowest thy self, what art thou? answer to me. And hee said, I know my self, for I am a Christian man, a Shepheard. What is it to be a Shep∣heard? And he answered, unto that thou askest what man is, I say that man is a substance composed of body & soul, the body is mortall and made of earth, as beasts be, but the soul is made of spirituall matter, as Angells be, immortall▪ My body is come of abominable sin, and as a sack full of durt and filth, and meat for wormes, my beginning was vile, my life is pain, labour, feare, and in subiection to death, and my end shall be wofull: but my soul is created of GOD, noblie and worthilie to his own image and semblance, after the Angels, the most fairest and perfect of all creatures, by baptism and by faith is made his daughter, his spouse, his heir of his realm, that is Paradise, and for her noblenesse and dignitie ought to be a Lady, and my body as servant ought to obey her, for reason hath ordained and will that it be so: and who that doth otherwise, and pre∣ferreth his body before his soul, leeseth the usage of reason, and maketh himself semblable unto beasts, descending from noble dignity, into mise∣rable servitude of sensuality, by the which it is grounded, so that I know my self man. As to the second, he demandeth what thing it is to be a Chri∣stian man: I answer, in my understanding, to be a Christian man is to be baptized or christned, and follow Iesus Christ, of whom we be said Christians for to be baptized, and not to follow him, or to follow him and not to be baptized saveth not man, and therefore when we receive baptism, we renounce the devill and all his pomps, and we make promise for to fol∣low Iesus Christ: when we say (we will be baptized) and who that kee∣peth this promise hath the very name of a Christian man, And who that keepeth it not, is a sinner and a lyer to God, and servant to the devil, and is no more christian than a dead man, or a painting on a wall, we say that is a man. Here demandeth the master Shepheard, in how manie things the Christian man ought to follow Iesus Christ for to accomplish the pro∣mise of baptism. The simple shepheard answereth, I say in six things, the first in cleannesse of conscience, for there is nothing more pleasant to God than a clean conscience, and it will be made clean in two manners, one is, by baptism when we receive it, and the other by patience, that is, contrition of heart, confession of mouth, satisfaction of work, and then when we be clean, we be pleasant to Iesus Christ, which with the water of his mercie cleanseth the sinners that do penance, and maketh them fair. The second thing in which we ought to follow Iesus Christ, is humility, at the example of him,

Lord of all the world, which humbled him to take our humanity, and be∣came mortall that was immortall, to live in poverty with us, bare oppro∣pried pain, and finally suffer to be crucified. Thus the christian man en∣suing him ought to meek himself. The third thing is to hold and love truth, and specially three truths; the first truth is to know our selves, for we be mortall, and sinfull, and who that dyeth in sin shall be damned, and this truth withholdeth sin, and exhorteth the sinner to doe penance and amend. The second truth is of temporall goods, for they be transitory and must be left, and this truth dispraiseth them to desire the heavenly goods that be eternall. The third truth is of God, which is the ioy that all Chri∣stian men ought to desire, and this truth draweth the Christian mā to love, and induceth him to good works for to merit the ioyes of Paradise. The fourth thing wherein every man ought to follow Iesus Christ, is patience in adversity, and in the spirit of life by pennace confirming of our selves in the estate of Iesus Christ, of whom the life was all in pain and poverty which he endured for us. The fift is in compassion of the poor, to the ex∣ample of Iesus Christ, that by his mercie healed the poor of all corporall infirmities, and the sinner of all ghostly sicknesse, and wee by compassion ought to give of our goods to poor folke, and comfort them bodily & ghost∣ly. The sixt thing wherein the christian man ought to follow Iesus Christ, is dolour, devotion, charity, in contemplation of the mysteries of his nati∣vity, of his death and passion, of his resurrection, of his ascension, and of his advancing to the iudgement, that oftentimes ought to be at our heart by holy meditations. And as to the last, what thing a shepheard is, I say it is the knowledge of my vocation, as each hath his, as afore is said, & al∣so to know the transgressions of all these aforesaid things, how many times in each we have transgressed, for many times we have offended God, and who that taketh heed, shall find omissions and offences without num∣ber, the which known, we ought to doubt and eschue, and do penance And thus it is as I know man is christian and shepheard.

CHAP. XVI. The ballad of a wise man.

I Know that God hath turned me, And made me to his owne likenesse; I know that he hath given to me truly; Soul and body, wit and knowledge ywis, I know that by right wise true ballance, After my deeds iudged shall I be▪ I know much, but I wot not the variance, To understand whereof commeth my folly.

I know full well that I shall die, And yet my life amend not I. I know in what poverty Borne a child this earth above. I know that God hath lent to me Abundance of goods to my behove. I know that riches can me not save, And with me I shall beare none away. I know the more good I have, The lother I shalbe to die. I know all this faithfully, And yet my life amend not I. I know that I have passed Great part of my days with ioy and pleasance. I know that I have gathered Sinnes, and also doe little penance. I know that by ignorance To excuse me there is no art. I know that once shal be When my soule shall depart, That I shall wish that I had mended me. I know there is no remedy, And therefore my life amend will I.

CHAP. XVI. Here followeth the ballad of the woman Shep∣heard, the which Ballad is very necessary and profitable to look upon.

IN considering my poor humanity, Above the earth born with great weeping. I consider my fragility, My heart is overprest with sinning. I consider death will come verily, To take my life, but the hour wot not I. I consider the devill doth watch me, The world and the flesh on me warreth straitly. I consider that mine enemies they be three, That would deliver me from death to death I consider the many tribulations Of this world, whereof the life is not clean.

[illustration]

I consider an hundered thousand passions, That we poor creatures daily fall in: I consider the longer I live the worse I am, Wherefore my conscience cryeth out on me. I consider for sin some be damned, as the book saith▪ Which shall ever be delivered from death to death. I consider that worms shall eat My sorrowfull bodie, this is credible. I consider that sinners shall be At the iudgment of God most dreadable. O Iesus Christ above all things delectable, Have mercy on me at the dreadfull day, That shall be so marvellous and doutable, Which my poor soul greatly doth fraie, In you that I put my trust and faith To save me, that I go not from death.

CHAP. XVII. The song of death to all Christian people.

[illustration]

Though my picture be not to your pleasance, And if ye think that it be dreadable,

[illustration]

Take in worth, for surely in substance The sight of it may to you be profitable, There is no way also more doubtable. Therefore learn, know your self and see, Look how I am and thus shall you be. And take heed of thy self in adventure read I, For Adams apple we must all die. Alas worldly people behold my manner, Sometime I lived with beauteous visage, Mine eine be gone, I have two holes here. I am meat for wormes in this passage: Take heed of wealth while ye have the usage, For as I am thou shalt come to dust, Holed as a thimble what shall thee advance? Nought but good deeds, thou maist me trust. All with my likenesse ye must dance. The time that I was in this world living, I was honored of low and hie, But I kept not my conscience clean from sinning, Therefore now I doe it dear abye. Lo what availeth covetise, pride, and envy, They be the brands that doe bren in hell. Trust not to your friends when ye be dead, read I, Nor your executors, for few doe well: But doe for thy self ere ever thou die; And remember while thou art living, That God blessed all things without nay, Except sin as accordeth writing. The devill cannot claim thee but by sin I say, Amend therefore betime and go the right way. I would that I might have but an houre or two, To doe penance in, or halfe a day, But while I lived I did none doe, But now my debts I doe truely pay. Thou man I doe give better counsell to thee, If that thou wilt doe after it, Then ever any was shewed to me. Thou art half warned thinke on thy pit, And choose of two wayes which thou wilt flie, To ioy or pain, one of the two, In weal or woe for ever to sit, Now at thine owne choice thou maist go. For God hath given thee free will, Now choose thee whether thou wilt do good or ill.

[illustration]

[illustration]

CHAP. XVIII. Hereafter followeth the ten Commandements of the devill.

WHo so will doe my commandements, And keep them well and sure, Shall have in hell great torments, That evermore shall endure. Thou shalt not feare God nor think of his goodnes, To damne thy soule blaspheme God and his saints, Evermore thine owne will be fast doing. Deceive men and women, and ever be swearing. Be drunken hardly upon the holy day, And cause other to sin if thou may. Father nor mother look thou love nor dread, Nor helpe them never, though they have need. Hate thy neighbour, and hurt him by envie, Murder and shed mans bloud hardly. Forgive no man, but be all vengeable. Be lecherous indeed, and in touching delectable. Breake thy wedlocke and spare not.

[illustration]

And to deceive other by falshood care not. The goods of other thou shalt hold falsly, And yeeld it no more, though they speak curteously. Company often with women, and tempt them to sin, Desire thy neighbors wife, and his goods to be thine. Do thus hardly, and care not therefore, And thou shalt dwell with me in hell evermore. Thou shalt ly in frost and fire with sicknes & hunger, And in a thousand peeces thou shalt be torne asunder. Yet shalt thou die ever, and never be dead, Thy meat sha••be toads, and thy drink boyling lead. Take no thought for the bloud that God for thee shed, And to my kingdome thou shalt be straight led.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Here followeth the reward of them that keep these comman∣dements aforesaid.

IN hell is great mourning, Great trouble of crying. Or thunder and noyse roaring, With great plenty of wild fire, Beating with great stroakes like guns, With great frost, and water runing. And after that a bitter wind comes. Which goeth through the soules with ire. There is both thirst and hunger, Fiends with hookes pulleth their flesh. They fight and curse and each other redeem With the sight of the devils dreadable. There is shame and confusion, Rumor of conscience for evill living. They curse themselves with great crying, In stinke and smoake evermore lying. With other great paines innumerable.

Man look that thou beware, I will smite all at unaware.

CHAP. XIX. It is written in the Apocalyps, that Saint John saw an horse of a pale colour on the which horse sate death, and hell following the horse. The horse signi∣fieth the sinner that hath a pale colour, for the infirmity of sin, and beareth death, for sin is death to the soul, and hell followeth for to englut and swal∣low him if he die impenitent.

ABove this horse blacke and hideous, Death I am that fiercely doe sit. There is no fairnesse but sight tedious. All gay colours I doe hit. My horse runneth by dales and hilles, And many he smiteth dead and killes.

In my trap I take some by every way, By townes and castles I take my rent, I will not respite one an houre of a day. Before me they must needs be present· I slay all with my mortall knife, And of duty I take the life. Hell knoweth well my killing, I sleep never but wake and warke, It followeth me ever runing. With my dart I slay weake and starke. A great number it hath of me, Paradise hath not the fourth part, Scant the tenth part wrong hath he. I cause many to sight at the heart. Beware, for I give no warning, Come, at once when I do knocke or call, For if thy book be not sure of reckoning Thou shalt to hell body soul and all.

CHAP. XX. Hereafter followeth how every estate should order them, in their degree.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Of a King.

THe imperiall might of a Kings maiesty, On four pillars grounded is governance, First do right, Iustice and equitie, To poore and rich both in a ballance, Then his regall might shall further and advance; He to be liberall with force and humanity, And after victory have mercy and pitty.

Of a Bishop.

O ye half Gods, flourishing in prudence, Ye Bishops with your devout pastorality, Teach the people with delicate eloquence. Annoint your flock with Christs divinity. Feed the poor people with hospitality. Be meek and chast in this millitant Church, Do first your self well example of your urch.

Of Knights.

O ye Knights refulgent in fortitude, With labour and travail to get love nobly, Fight for the poor commons that be poor and rude. And if need be, for the Church thou die. Love truth, hate wrong and villany. Appease the people by thy magnificence, And unto whom be a shield of defence.

Of Iudges.

O ye Iudges governing the Law, Let not your hands be anointed with meed, Save all true men, rebels hang and draw. To avoid favour, let righteousnesse proceed, For a good name is better than riches indeed. Some say that Lawes truth is laid down, And therefore love and charity is out of town.

Of Marchants.

O ye marchants that never say ho, Of lucrous winning you have great pleasure, Let conscience guide you where ever ye goe. Vnto all men give you weight and measure. Deceive no man, of falshood take no cure, Swear none oathes, people to beguile, All sleight and usurie from you excile.

[illustration]

Of Masters.

O ye masters and housholders all, That have servants under your cure, Put them to labour whatsoever befall. And let the yong folke of awe be in ure. After their age intreat each creature: Servants wages pay ye well and even, If ye do not, it crieth vengeance to heaven.

Of all women.

O ye women of each manner degree, To your husbands, be never disobedient, Desire not above them the soveraigntie. For then ye do as Lucifer did incontinent. That would be above the high God omnipotent: Shamfastnesse, dread, cleannesse and chastity, Of verie right all these in womanhead should be.

The generality.

Goe home ye persons and couch not in Court, To teach Christ servants, and keep the owne labour, Thou niggard sow out thy hoord In houshold, and be none extortioner. Monk pray, preach Frier, Marchant go near and fear, Dread God, keep his law, and honour your King, And your reward shall you have at your ending.

Thus endeth the estate and order of every degree.

CHAP. XXI. Of the tree of Vices, and after followeth the tree of meeknesse, mother and root of all vertues.

HEreafter followeth the tree of vices, and then after that is the tree of vertue set, that after every sin beholding, they may look on it as a mirror and take of the fruit of spirituall refec∣tion, and flie the dead tree of vices. For after the tree of vices followeth the signification of every nature named in the said tree of vertues, and first is humanity or meeknesse, mother of all vertues, and root of the tree, the which whē it is stedfast, the tree standeth upright, and if it fail, the tree falleth with all his branches. Humility is a volun∣tarie inclination of the thought and courage, comming of the knowledge of God, and it hath seven principal branches that constituteth the tree of ver∣tues▪ and they be these. Charitty Faith, Hope, Prudence, Attemperance, Iustice, and Force, and out of every of them commeth divers other vertues as the tree sheweth, and is declared afterward compendiously.

[illustration]

The tree of vices.

• ...
  Pride root of all sinns.
  • ...
    Envy.
    • Detraction.
    • Ioy of adversity.
    • Sorrow of prosperity.
    • Homicide.
    • Wickednesse.
    • Susurration.
    • Ill machination.
  • ...
    Covetise.
    • Theft.
    • Deceiving.
    • Forswearing.
    • Vsury.
    • Rapine.
    • Treason.
    • Simony.
• ...
  The large way.
  • ...
    Ire.
    • Woodnesse.
    • Indignation.
    • Clamour.
    • Blaspheming.
    • Great courage.
    • Noyse.
    • Hate.
  • ...
    Vaine glory.
    • Singularitie▪
    • Discord.
    • Inobedience.
    • Presumption.
    • Boasting.
    • Obstination.
    • Hypocrisie.
• ...
  The fruit of the flesh.
  • ...
    Glutony.
    • Foolish reioycing.
    • Immundicity.
    • Too much speaking.
    • Eating by leasure.
    • Obtuse wit.
    • Lickernesse.
    • Drunkennesse.
  • ...
    Sloth.
    • Idlenesse.
    • Erre in the faith.
    • Tristesse.
    • Omission.
    • Despair.
  • ...
    Lechery.
    • Vnstablenesse.
    • Love the world.
    • Blind thought.
    • Love of himself.
    • Precination.
    • Hatred of God.
    • Vnconsideration.
    • Wantonnesse.
    • Incontinence.

The tree of vertues.

• ...
  Meeknes root of all vertues.
  • ...
    Force.
    • Felicity.
    • Confidence.
    • Tolerance.
    • Rest.
    • Stablenesse.
    • Perseverance.
    • Magnificence.
  • ...
    Iustice.
    • Law.
    • Straightnesse.
    • Equity.
    • Correction.
    • Observance.
    • Iudgment.
    • Veritie.
• ...
  The nar∣row way.
  • ...
    Tēperance.
    • Discretion.
    • Moderality.
    • Taciturnity.
    • Fasting.
    • Sobernesse.
    • Affliction.
    • Dispraising.
  • ...
    Prudēce.
    • Dread of God.
    • Counsell.
    • Memory.
    • Intelligence.
    • Providence.
    • Deliberation.
    • Reason.
• ...
  The fruit of the soul.
  • ...
    Hope.
    • Contemplation.
    • Ioy.
    • Honesty.
    • Confession.
    • Patience.
    • Compunction.
    • Longanimitie.
  • ...
    Faith.
    • Religion.
    • Cleannesse.
    • Obedience.
    • Chastity.
    • Continence.
    • Affection.
    • Virginity.
  • ...
    Charity.
    • Grace.
    • Pittie.
    • Peace.
    • Sweetnes.
    • Mercy.
    • Forgivenes.
    • Compassion.
    • Benignitie.
    • Concord.

Of Charitie.

CHarity is a right high vertue above all other, and is an ardent desire well ordained to love God & his neighbor, and these be the branches, grace, peace pity, sweetnes, mercy, indulgence, compass••on, benignity, and concord. Grace is, by the which is shewed an effectual service of benevolence amongst friends, from one friend to ano∣ther. Peace is tranquillity and rest wel ordained of the courages of them that be concording unto God. Pittie is affection and desire to succour and help each one, & commeth of sweet∣nes & grace, of benign thought and courage that one hath. Sweetnesse is by the which tranquillity and rest of courage of him that is sweet and ho∣nest by none improbity, ne by any point of dishonesty. Mercie is a pitifull vertue and equall dignation to all, with inclination of compatient courage in them that sustain affliction. Indulgence is remission of the evill doing of other by the consideration of himself, he hath offended divers, to have remission of God for the offences he hath done. Compassion is a vertue the which ingendereth an affection or condolent courage for the dolour and af∣fliction that he seeth in his neighbour. Benignity is an ardent regard of courage and diligence from one friend to another, with a replenishing dul∣sure and sweetnes of good manners that one hath Concord is a vertue that commeth of covenance of courages concorded and alied in right unde∣filed, in such sort as they abide united and conioyned stedfastly without du∣plicity or unstablenesse of thought or courage.

Of Faith.

FAith is a vertue by the true knowledge of visible things ha∣ving his thought elevate in holy studying for to come to the beleef of things that we see not, and these been the branches. Religion, Cleannes, Obedience, Chastity, Continence, Virgi∣nity, and Affection Religion is by the which been exercised and done the divine services to God, and unto his saints with great reverence & great diligēce, the which services bee done ceremonially & sweetly. Clean∣nes or virginity is integrate, well, and purely kept, as well in body as in soul, for the regard that a man hath of the love or fear of God. Obedience is a voluntary and free abnegation and renouncing of his own wil by pit∣tifull devotion Chastity is cleanlines and the honest habitude of all the body by ardent heat and furiosity of vices so domaged and holden subiects. Continence is by the which impetuosity of carnall desires been refrained and withholden, by a moderation of counsell taken of himself or other. Af∣fection

is effusion of pittifull love to his neighbour, comming of a reioycing conceived of good faith in them that they love. Liberality is a vertue by the which the liberall courage is not kept by any manner of covetise, for do∣ing plenteous largition of his goods without excesse, but moderately to them that ha••e need.

Of Hope.

HOpe is a mooving of courage abiding stedfastly to take and have the things that a man appetiteth and desireth, of the which the branches been contemplation, Ioy, Ho∣nesty, confession, patience, compunction, and Longani∣mity. Contemplation is the death and destruction of carnall affections, by an interior reioycing of thought, elevat to comprise high things. Ioy is iocundity spiritu∣all comming of the contempment of the things present and worldly. Honesty is a shame by the which a man yeeldeth himself humble toward every man, of the which cometh a laudable profit, with faire custom and honesty. Con∣fession is by the which the secret sicknesse of soul is relevate, and shewed unto the confessor to the praysing of God, with hope to have mercy. Pa∣tience is will, and inseparable sufferance of adversary and contrary things▪ for hope of eternall glory that we desire to have. Compunction is a do∣lour of great value sighing for fear of the compunction divine, or for love of the paiment that we abide. Longanimity is infatigable will to accomplish the holy and iust desires that a man hath in his thought.

Of Prudence.

PRudence is diligent keeping of himself with discreet providence, to know and discern, which is good, and which is bad, and the branches are these: Fear of God, counsell, memory, Intelligence, Providence, and Deli∣beration. Fear of God is a diligent keeping, which wakeneth on a man by faith and good manners of the divine commandements. Counsell is a subtile regard of thoughts, that the causes of such things a man would doe, or that a man hath in government, be well examined and brought about. Memory is a representation imaginative by regard of the thought of things preterities and passed that a man hath seen and done, or heard recounted and told. Intelligence is for to dispose by vivacity reasonably or evidently the state of the time present, or of the things that been now. Providence is that

that by which a man gathereth in him the advancement of things to come by prudent subtiltie and regard of things passed. Deliberation is a con∣sideration replenished maturity and esperance to foresee the begining of such things as one hath delibered and purposed to do or make.

Of Attemperance.

ATtemperance is a stedfast and a discreet domination of reason, against the impiteous movings of the courage in things illicit and unlawfull, and these be his branches. Discretion, Mora∣lity, Taciturnity, Fasting, Sobernesse, Affliction, and dis∣praising of the world. Descretion is a reason provided & assu∣red, and moderate of the humane movings, to iudge and discerne the cause of all things. Morality is to be tempered and ruled iustly and sweetly, by the manners of them with whom they be conversant keeping alwayes the vertue of nature. Taciturnity is to attemper himself of inutile and disho∣nest words, of the which vertue commeth a fruitfull rest unto him that so himself moderateth. Fasting is a vertue of discreet abstinence the which a man keepeth, ordained to wake and keep the sanctified things interiors. Sobernesse is a vertue pure, and immaculate attemperance of the one part and of the other of a man, of the body and soul. Affliction of body is it, by the which the seeds of the wanton and wilfull thoughts, by discreet chasti∣sings be oppressed. Dispraising of the world is amorous love that a man or a woman hath to the spirituall things coming, and having no regard to the caducke things and transitories of this world.

Of Justice.

IVstice is a vertue whereby grace of community is up∣holden, and the dignity of every person is observed, and their owne yeelded, and the branches be these. Law, Straightnes, Equity, Correction, Observance, Iudge∣ment, and vertue. Law is by the which all lawfull things bee commanded to be done, and to defend all things which ought not to be done. Straightnes is by the which iuridicke vengeance is prohibited, and straightly is exercised iustice to the transgressors that have offended. Equity is a right wor∣thy retribution of merite to the ballance of Iustice, right wisely and iustly thought. Correction is for to inhibite and defend by the bridle of reason all errors, if any bee accustomed for to doe any evill. Ob∣servance of Swearing is a Iustice to constrain any noisible transgres∣sion

of Law or Customes promulged to the People. Iudgement is by the which after the merits or demerits of any persons heard, is that he have torment or suffer death for his evill doing, or guerdon, and re∣ward for his benefits. Verity is that by the which any sayings or doings be recited or shewed by approvable reason, without to adiust, diminish, or to make it any otherwise than it is.

Of Force.

FOrce, is for to have a sure and stedfast courage among the ad∣versities of labors and perils that may happen to come, or into the which a person may fall, And the branches be these. Mag∣nificence, Confidence, Tolerance, Rest, Stablenesse, Perse∣verance, and reason. Magnificence is a ioyous clearnes of cou∣rage, administring things laudable and magnificentiall, that is to say, high or great. Confidence is to arrest and hold strongly his thought and his courage, by unmoveable constance among such things as be adverse and contrarie. Tollerance is quotidianly or daily suffering and bearing the strange improbities and molests, that is to say, persecutions▪ opprobries, and iniuries that other folk doe. Rest is a virtue by the which a sickerness is given unto the thought of contentment of the unstableness of transitory things and worldly vanities. Stableness is to have the thought or cou∣rage stedfast and sure without casting on divers things by any varying or changing of time or places. Perseverance is a vertue that establisheth and confirmeth the courage by a perfection of vertue that is in a man, & be per∣fect by force of longanimitie. Reason is a vertue by the which a man com∣mandeth to do such things as be concealed and delivered for to come to the end, which a man knoweth to be good and utile to be done and had.

Here endeth the flower of vertues, and how they be named and signified in the tree figured.

CHAP. XXII. How Shepheards by calculation and speculation know the xii. signes in their course reigning and domining over the xii. parts of mans body, and which be good for letting of blood, and which be indifferent, or evill for the same.

[illustration]

SOme shepheardes say that mā is a litle world by himself, for likenes∣ses & similitudes that hee hath of the great world, which is the ag∣gregation of the nine skies, four elementes, and all things in them contained. First, a man hath such a likenes in the first mobile, that is the soveraign skie, and principall parts of the great world. For like as in his first mobi∣le the Zodiake is divided in xii parts by the xii signes, so man is divided to xii parts and holdeth of the signes, every part of his signe as this figure sheweth. The signes be these. Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, Libra, Scorpio, Sagittarius, Capricornus, Aquarius, and Pisces: of the which three be of the nature of the fire, that is, Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, & three of the nature of the aire, Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius. And three of the nature of water, Cancer, Scorpio, & Pis∣ces. And three of the nature of earth▪ Taurus Virgo, and Capricornus. The first that is Aries, governeth the head and face of ma••, Taurus the necke and throat bole, Gemini the shoulders, the armes, and hands, Can∣cer the breast▪ sides, milte, and lights, Leo the stomacke, the heart, and the backe, Virgo, the belly, and the entrailes. Libra the navill the groines, and the parts under the bran∣ches, Scorpio the privy parts, the genitales, the bladder, and the fundament, Sagittari∣us the thighes only, Capricornus the knees only also, Aquarius the legs and from the knees to the heels and ankles, and Pisces hath the feet in his dominion.

A man ought not to make incision▪ ne touch with iron the member gover∣ned of any signe, the day that the moone is in it, for fear of the great effu∣sion of blood that might happen, ne in likewise also when the Sun is in it, for the danger and perill that might ensue.

Hereafter followeth the nature of the xii signes.

ARies is good for blood-letting when the Moone is in it, save in the part that it domineth.

Aries hot and dry, nature of fire, and governeth the head and the face of man, good for bleeding when the moon is in it.

Taurus is evill for bleeding. Taurus is dry & cold, nature of the earth and governeth the necke, and the knot under the throat, & is evill for blee∣ding.

Gemini is evill for bleeding, Gemini is hot and moist, nature of aire, and governeth the shoulders, the armes, & the two hands & ••s evill for bleeding

Cancer is indifferent for bleeding Cancer is cold and moist, nature of water, and governeth the breast, the stomacke and the milt, and indifferent that is to say neither too good nor too bad for letting of blood.

Leo is evill for bleeding. Leo is hot and dry, nature of fire, and governeth the backe and the sides and is evill for letting blood.

Virgo is indifferent for bleeding. Virgo is cold and dry, nature of earth, and governeth the wombe, and inward parts, and is not good ne very evill for bleeding.

Libra is right good for bleeding. Libra is hot and moist, nature of ayre, and governeth the navill, the reynes, and the low parts of the wombe, and is good for bleeding.

Scorpio is indifferent for bleeding. Scorpio is cold & moist, nature of water, & governeth the members of man, & is neither good ne bad for blee∣ding.

Sagittarius is good for bleeding. Sagittarius is hot and dry, nature of fire, and governeth the thighs, and is good for bleeding.

Capricornus is evill for bleeding Capricornus is cold and dry, nature of earth, and governeth the knees, and is evill for bleeding.

Aquarius is indifferent for bleeding. Aquarius is hot & moist of nature, and governeth the legs, and is neither good ne evill for bleeding

Pisces is indifferent for bleeding. Pisces is cold and moist, nature of wa∣ter, and governeth the feet, and is neither good ne bad for bleeding.

Aries, Libra, and Sagittarius be right good.

Cancer, Virgo, Scorpiō, Aquarius, & Pisces, be indifferent.

Taurus, Gemini, Leo, and Capricornus, be evill for bleeding.

CHAP. XXIII. A Picture of the Phisnomy of mans body, and sheweth in what parts the vii Planets have domination in man.

We may know by this figure the bones and ioynts of all the parts of the body, as well within as without, of the head, necke, shoulders, armes, hands, besides breast, back, haunches, thighs, knees, legges▪ and of the feet. Which bones shall be named and numbred hereafter, and it is called the figure Anatomy.

[illustration]

By this figure one may understand the parts of mans body, over the which the planets have might and domination to keep them from touching any yron, ne to make incision of bloud in the veines that proceed in the time while that the planet of the said party is conioyned with any other planet malevolent, without having regard of some good planet that might in cumber and let his evill course.

CHAP. XXIV. The names of the Bones in a mans body, and the number of them, which is in all two hundred eight and forty.

FIrst on the summet of the head is a bone that covereth the brain the which shepheards call the Capitall bone. In the skull be two bones, which be called parietales, that holdeth the brain close & stedfast. More lower in the brain is a bone called the crown of the head, and on the one side and on the o∣ther be two holes, within the which is the pallis or roof bone. In the part behind the head be four like bones, to the which the chine of the neck hol∣deth. The bones of the nose be two. The bones of the chafts be xi. And of the nether iaw be two. Above the opposite of the brain there is one behind named collaterall. The bones of the teeth be xxx. eight before, four above, and four underneath, sharp and trenching for to cut the morsels, and there are four sharp, two above, and two underneath, and be called conines, for they resemble conies teeth. After these be 16. that be as they were hammers or grinding teeth, for they chaw and grind the meat the which is eaten, and there is on every side four above and four underneath, and then the four teeth of sapience on each side of the chafts one above and one under∣neath. In the chine from the head downwards be xxx. bones, called knots or ioynts. In the breast afore seven bones, and on every side xii. ribs. By the neck between the head and the shoulders be two bones, name•• the sheares. After be the two shoulder blades. From the shoulders to each elbow in each arme is a bone called the adiutor. From the the elbow to the hand on each arm be two bones that be called cannes. In each hand be vii. bones, above the palm be four bones, which be called the comb of the hand. The bones in the fingers in each hand be xv. in every finger three. At the end of the ridge be the huckle bones, whereto be fastned the two bones of the thighs. In each knee is a bone, called the knee plate. From the knee to the foot in each legge be two bones, ealled cannes or marrow-bones. In each foot is a bone, called the ancle or pinne of the foot: behind that ancle is the heel bone in each foot, the which is the lowest part of a man, and a∣bove each foot is a bone called the hollow bone. In the plant of each foot be iiii. bones, then be the combes of the feet, in each of which be v bones. The bones in the toes in each foot be the number of xiiii. Two bones be tofore the belly, for to hold it stedfast with the two branches. Two bones be in the head behind the eares, called oculars. We reckon not the tender bones of the end of the shoulders, nor of the sides, nor divers little gristles and spel∣ders of bones, for they be comprehended in the number abovesaid.

Thus endeth the Anatomy, and followeth the Phlebotomy.

Hereafter followeth the names of the veines, and where they rest, and how they ought to be letten bloud.

[illustration]

WE may understand by this figure the number of the veines, & the places of a mans body where they be, and how they ought to be let bloud, and no where else, so that it be a naturall day for bloud let∣ting, that the Moon be not new, ne at the full, ne in the quarter, & that it be in any sign before na∣med good for bleeding, but if that such signe were that it domineth the member of the which bloud should be letten, for then it ought not for to be touched, ne also that it be the signe of the sun.

The names of the places where the veines be, are shewed by the letters set in the margent at the beginning of the matter after the form of the Picture.

A The vein in the middest of the forehead would be letten bloud for the ache and pain of the head, and for fevers, lethargy, and for the megrim.

B Above the two eares behind is two veines the which be let bloud for to give cleer understanding, and the vertue of light hearing, and for thick breath, and for doubt of mese••ry.

C In the temples been two veines called the Arteries, for that they pant, the which been letten bloud for to diminish and take away the great reple∣tion and abundance of bloud that is in the brain, that might noy the head and the eies, and it is good against the gout, megrim, and divers other accidents that may come to the head.

D under the tongue be two veines that been letten bloud for a sicknesse na∣med the Sequamy, and against the swelling and apostumes of the throat, and against the Squinancy, by the which a man might die sudainly, for de∣fault of such bleeding.

E In the neck be two veines called Originales, for that they have the course and abundance of all the bloud that governeth the body of man, and principally the head, but they ought not to be let bloud without the counsel of the surgion, and this bleeding availeth much to the sicknesse of Leprosie, when it cometh principally of bloud.

F The vein of the heart taken in the arm, profiteth to take away hu∣mours or ill bloud that might hurt the chamber of the heart, or the appurte∣nance, and it is good for them that spit bloud, that be short winded, by the which a man may die sudainly by default of such bleeding.

G The vein of the liver taken in the arm, taketh and diminisheth the great heat of the body of man, and holdeth the body in health, and this bleeding is profitable against the yellow axes and apostumes of the liver, and against the plurisie, whereby a man may die by fault of such bleeding.

H Between the master finger and the leach, to let bloud, helpeth the do∣lours that commeth in the stomack and sides, as botches, apostumes, and divers other accidents that may come in those places by great abundance of bloud and humours.

I In the sides between the womb and the branch, be two veins, of the whi••h that of the right side is let bloud for the Dropsie, and that of the left side for every sicknesse that commeth about the milt, & they should bleed after persons be fat or lean, take good heed at four fingers nie the incision, also they not to make such bleeding without counsell of the surgion.

K In every foot be three veins, of the which three veines, one is under the ancle of the foot named Sophan, the which is let bloud for to diminish and put out divers humours, as botches and apostumes that commeth a∣bout

the groynes, and it profiteth much to women for to cause their men∣struosity to descend and to fixe the emeroydes, that commeth in the secret places, and such other like.

L Between the wrest of the foot and the great toe is a vein, the which is letten bloud for divers sicknesses and inconveniences, as the pestilence, that taketh a person suddenly by the great superabundance of humours, and this bleeding must be made within a naturall day that is to wit, with∣in xxiiii howres after that the sicknesse is taken of the patient, and before the fever come on him, and this bleeding ought to be done after the corpu∣lence of the patient.

M In the Angels of the eies be two veines, the which be let bloud for the rednes of the eies, or water that runeth continually, and for divers other sicknesses that may happen and come by over great abundance of humors and bloud.

N In the veine of the end of the nose is made a bleeding, the which is good for a red pimpled face, as be red drops, pustules, smal scabs, and other infections of the heart, that may come therein by the great replexion and abundance of bloud and humors, and it availeth against pimpled noses, and other semblable sicknes.

O ••n the mou•••• in the gummes be four veines, that is to wit, two a∣bove and two beneath, the which be let bloud for the chafing and canker in the mouth, and for tooth-ach.

P Between the lip and the chinne is a vein that is letten bloud to give amendment to them that have an evill breath.

Q In each arme be foure veines, of the which the vein of the head is the highest, the second next, is from the heart, the third is of the liver, and the fourth is from the milt, otherwise called the low liver vaine.

R The vein in the head taken in the arme, ought to bleed for to take a∣way the great replexion & abundance of bloud that may annoy the head, the eies, and the brain, and availeth greatly for transmutable heats, and swelling of the throat, and to them that hath swollen faces and red, and to divers other sicknesses that may fall by too great abundance of bloud.

S The vein of the milt, otherwise called the low vein, should bleed a∣gainst all feaver tertians, and quartaines, and it ought to be made a large and lesse deep wound then in any other vein, for fear of wind that it may gather and for more inconvenience, for fear of a sinew that is under it, which is called the Lezard.

T In each hand be three veines, whereof that above the thumbe ought to bleed, to take away the great heat of the visage, and for the thicke bloud and humours that be in the head, this vein evacuateth more then that of the arme.

V Between the little finger and the lech finger is letting of bloud that a∣vaileth greatly against fever tertians & quartaines, and against fumes, &

divers other lettings that commeth to the paps and the milt.

X In each thigh is a vein, of the which the bleeding availeth against the dolours and swellings of the genitours, and for to avoid and drive out of a mans body humors that be in the groines.

Y The vein that is under the ancle of the foot without, named Sciat of the which the bleeding is much worth against the paines of the branches, and for to make depart and issue divers humours, which would assemble in the said place, and availeth greatly to women for to restrain their men∣struosity when they have too great abundance.

Thus endeth the Anatomy and Flebotomy of the humane bodies, and how one should understand them.

HEre before we have said of the regard of plannets upon the parts of man, and the devision and number of the bones of mans body, and now followeth to know when any man is whole or sicke, or disposed in any wise to sicknesse. Wherfore three things been, by the which Shepheards know when a man is whole or sicke, or disposed to sicknesse. If he be whole, to maintain and keep him, if he be sicke, to search remedy to heal him. If he be dispo∣sed to sicknesse, to keep him that he fall not therein. And to know each of the said three things, the Shepheards put divers signes. Health proper∣ly attemperance, accord, and equality of the four equalities of man which be hot, cold, dry, and moist. The which when they be well tempered and equall, that one surmounteth not the other, then the body of man is whole But when they be unequall and distempered, that one domineth over ano∣ther, then a man is sicke, or disposed to sicknesse, and they be the qualities that the bodies holdeth of the elements, that they be made and composed of, to wit, of the fire heat, of the water cold, of the ayre moist, and of the earth dry. The which qualities when one is disordered from the other, then the body is sicke. And if that one destroy the other of all, then the body dyeth, and the soul departeth.

CHAP. XXV. Signes by the which Shepheards know a man whole and well disposed in his body.

THe first signe whereby Shepheards know a man to be whole and wel disposed in his body, is when he eateth and drinketh well after the convenance of the hunger and thirst that he hath, without making excesse. Also when he disgesteth lightly, and when that he hath eaten and drun∣ken empesheth and grieveth not his stomack. Also when he feeleth good sa••vour and appetite in that he eateth & drinketh. Also when he is hungry and thirsty at the howres they ought to eat and drinke. And when he reioyceth

him with merry folke. And when they play gladly any play of recreaton, with fellows of merry courage. Also when he playeth gladly in fields and woods, to take the sweet ayre, and sport in meddowes by waters sides. Also when he eateth gladly, & with good appetite of butter, chees, flawnes, sheeps milke, without leaving any thing in his dish to send to the almes∣house. And when he sleepeth well without raving dream of his marchan∣dise. Also when he feeleth him light, and that he waketh well. Also when he sweateth soon, and that neeseth little or nothing. And when he is nei∣ther too fat nor too lean. Also when he hath good colour in his face, and that his wits been all well disposed for to doe their operations, as his eyes for to see, his eares to hear, his nose to smell, &c. And thus we leave off the continuance of age, the disposition of the body, and also of the time. Of other signes I say nothing, but these be the most common, and that ought to suffice for shepheards to know the signes of health.

Signes opposite to the precedents, by which shepheards know when they or other been sick.

FIrst, when he will not well eat, ne drinke, or that they have none appetite to eat at dinner or supper, or when he findeth no savour in that he eateth and drinketh, or that he is hun∣gry and may not eat, when his digestion is not good, or that it bee too long. Also when he goeth not to the chamber mode∣rately as he ought to doe. Also when he is heavy and sad in ioyous compa∣nies, when sicknes causeth a man to be thoughtfull. Semblably, when he may not sleep nor take his rest aright and at due howres. Also when his members been heavy, as his head, his legges, and his armes. And also when he may not walke easily and lightly, and that he sheweth not often, & his colour is pale and yellow, or when his wits, as his eyes, his eares, and the other do not kindly their operation. In likewise when he may not labour and travel. Also when he forgeteth lightly that which of necessity ought to be kept in memory, and when he spits often, or when his nostrils aboundeth in superfluous humours. And when he is negligent in his works, & when his flesh is blown or swollen, in the visage, in his legs, or his feet, or when his eyes be hollow in his head. These been the signes that signifieth a man being in sicknesse, and who that hath most of the fore∣said signes, most is sicke.

CHAP. XXVI. Of other manner of signes almost semblable to them abovesaid, and sheweth the replexion of evill humors, for to be purged of them.

REplexion of evill humours, and disposition of sickness, after the opini∣on of Shepheards, the which replexion is knowne how to purge the

said humors that they ingender on sicknes and been broken by the signes that followeth. First when a man hath over great rednesse in the face, in the hands, or in the nailes, having also the veines full of bloud, or bleed too much at the nose, or too often, or have pain in the forehead. Also when the eares soundeth, and when the eyes water or be full of gum, and have the understanding troubled, and when the pulse beateth too fast, and when the belly is long resolute and laxe, and when one hath the sight troubled, and eating without appetite. And all the other signes before said been, by the which one may know the body evill disposed, and have in it corrupt hu∣mors, superfluous and evill.

Thus finish the signes, by the which Shepheards know when they be whole and wel disposed, and other signes apposite by the which they know when they be sicke or ill disposed.

CHAP. XXVII. A division and regime of time, of the which shepheards useth, after that the season and time requireth.

FOr to remedy the sicknesses and infirmities that a man hath, and to keep him from them which he doubteth to come. Shep∣heards say that the time naturally changeth four times a yeer, and so they divide the yeer into four quarters, that is, Ver, Summer, Harvest, & Winter. And in each of these quar∣ters they governe them as the season requireth to their mindes, and the better it is for them. And as the season changeth, so change they their manner of living and doing, and say that changing of time without ta∣king good heed, often ingendereth infirmities, for that in one time behoo∣veth not to use some meats which be good at another time, as that used in winter is not good in summer, and so of the other seasons. And for to know the changing of time after the said parties, they consider the course of the Sunne by the twelve signes, and say that every of the said four quarters and seasons dureth three months, and that the Sun passeth by three signes that is to wit, in prime time by Pisces, Aries, and Taurus, and these be the months, February, March, and Aprill, that the earth and trees reioyceth, and chargeth with green leaves & flowers, as it is a plea∣sure to behold. In summer by Gemini, Cancer, and Leo, and the months been May, Iune, and Iuly, that the fruits of the earth groweth and ripe∣neth. In harvest by Virgo, Libra, and Scorpio, and the months been Au∣gust, September, and October, that the earth and trees dischargeth fruits and leaves and that time each felleth and gathereth the fruits. In Winter by Sagittarius, Capricornus and Aquarius, and the months been No∣vember, December and Ianuary that the earth and trees been as dead and unclothed, of leaves, fruits, and of all greennesse. After the which four seasons. Shepheards deviseth the time that man may live in four

ages, as youth, strength, age, and decrepit, and been likened to the four sea∣sons of the yeer: That is to wit, youth to Prime time, that is hot and moist and as the herbs and trees of the earth grow, so doth man in youth, unto xv yeers, grow of body, in strength, beauty and vigor. Force is like∣ned unto summer, hot & dry, & the body of man is in force & vigor, & enripe∣neth unto xlv. yeers. Age is compared to the time of Harvest, cold & dry, then man leaveth off growing & feebleth, & thinketh how to gather & spare for fear of default & need when as hee commeth to stooping age, & dureth to lvi yeers. Decrepit is likened unto the season of the Winter, cold & hu∣mid by abundance of cold humors, & default of naturall heat: in which time man spendeth that which he had gathered & kept in the time passed, and if he have spared nothing, he abideth poor and naked, as the earth, trees, and dureth unto lxii. yeers or more. Prime time is hot and moist, nature of ayr, complexion of the sanguine. Summer is hot dry, nature of fire, complexion of cholerick. Harvest is cold and dry, nature of earth, and complexion of the melancholy. Winter is cold and moist, nature of water, complexion of the flegmatick. When complexion is well proportioned it feeleth it self better disposed in the time sembable to it, than it doth in other times. But for that every man is not well complexioned, they ought to doe as shepheards doe, that is, to take regiment to keep themselves after the seasons, and governeth them by their ensignements and teachings, which they use in every quarter of the yeer, to live the longer, wiselier, and merrily.

The regiment for Prime time, March, Aprill, and May.

IN Prime time, shepheards keep themselves meetly well clothed, not over cold, nor over hot, as with linsie wolsie, Doublets of Fustian, and gownes of a meetly length, furred with Lamb most commonly. In this time is good letting bloud, to avoid the evill humours that were gathered in the winter time. If sicknesse doe happen in prime time, it is not of his nature, but proceedeth of the humors gathered in the winter passed. Prime time is a temperat time to take medicines for them that be corporate and full of thick humors to purge them. In this time they ought to eat light meats, which doe refresh, as Chickens, Kids with veriuyce, Borage, Beets, yolks of egges, egges in moon shine, Roches, Perches, Pi∣kerels, and all skaled fish. Drink temperate wine, Beer, or Ale, so that they be not too strong, ne oversweet: for in this time all sweet things ought not to be used: and a man ought to sleep long in the morning, and not on the day. The shepheards have a generall rule or custome for all seasons, that availeth much against all infirmities and sicknesses, that is, not to leese his appetite for eating, and never to eat without hunger. Also say they, that all manner of flesh and fish is better rosted than soden, and if they ben sodden, to

broil them on a Gridyron, on the coales, and they been the more whole∣some.

The regiment for the time of Summer, June, July, and August.

THe shepheards in summer been clothed with light gowns and single, their shirts and sheets that they ly in be linnen, for of all cloath it is the coldest, they have doublets of silk, or Say, or of Canvas, manerly made, and they eat light meats, as Chickens with veriuyce, young Hares, Rabbets, Lettise, Purselain, Melons, Gowrds, Cucumbers, Peares, Plumbs, and such fish as are aforenamed. And also they eat of meats that do refresh. Also they eat little and often; they break their fast or dine in the morning before the sun arise, and goe to supper ere it discend, and they eat often of the above said meats and sowrer for to give the man appetite. They eat but little salt meats, and refrain them from scratching, they drink oft fresh water when they be thirsty, save only at dinner and supper time, and then they do drink feebl green Wine, single Beer, or small Ale. Al∣so they keep them from over great travell, or over forcing themselves, for in this time is nothing grievouser than chafing. In this season they eschue the company of women, and they bathe them oft in cold water to asswage the heat of their bodies enforced by labours. Alway they have with them sugarcandy or other Sugar whereof they take little and often, and each day in the morning they do force them by coughing and spitting, to void flegmes, and void them above and below the best that they can, and wash their hands with fresh water, their mouth and visage.

The regiment for Harvest, September, October, and November.

IN harvest, shepheards been clothed as in Prime time, save their cloths are a little warmer. In this season they use diligence to purge and clense themselves, bleeding also to temper the humours of their bodyes: For it is the contagiousest season of the yeer, in the which perillous infirmi∣ties happen, and therefore they eat good and wholesome food, as Capons, Hens, yong Pigeons that begin to fly, and drink good wines, and o∣ther good drinkes without making excesse. In this season they refrain eating of fruits, for it is a dangerous season for agues: and they say, that he had never ague that never eat fruit. In this season they drink no wa∣ter, and they put no part of them in cold water, but their hands & face. They keep their hands from cold in the night and morning, and sleep not in the noon time, and refrain over great travell, and indure not too much hun∣ger, ne thirst, but eat in due season, and not when their mawes be full.

The regiment for Winter, December, January, and February.

THe shepheards in winter are clothed in thick gowns of rough cloth hie shorne well furred with foxe. For it is the warmest furring that is, and Cats, Conies, Lambs, and diverse other thicke furres that be good and wholsome. In the winter shep∣heards do eat beef, Pork, Brawn of Harts, Hinds and all kind of venison, Partriges, Fesants, Hares, fowles of the river and other meats that they love best: for that is the season of the year that nature suffereth greatest plenty of vittle for the naturall heat that is drawn with in the body. In this season also they drink oft strong wines, after their cō∣plexion, bastard or Osey. Twice or thrice in the week they use good spi∣ces in their meats: For this is the wholsomest season of all the yeer in the which chanceth no sicknesse, but by great excesse and outrages done to na∣ture, or by evill government. Shepheards say also that Prime time is hot & moist, of the nature of ayr, complexion of the sanguine, and that in the same season nature reioyceth, and the pores open, and the bloud spreads through the veins more than another time. Summer is hot and dry of the nature of fire, of complexion of cholerick, when one ought to keep him from all things that procure heat, all excesse, and hot meats. Harvest is cold and dry of the nature of earth & complexion of melancholy, in the which time one ought to keep him from doing excesse more thā at other times. But winter is cold and moist, of the nature of water, and complexion of flegma∣tick, then ought a man to keep him warm and meanly to live in health.

Here is to be noted that a man is made of the four Elements, of which one hath domination alwayes above the other, and that man on whom the fire ruleth is said to be cholerick, that is to say, hot and dry He on whom the ayr hath rule, is said to be sanguine: that is to say hot and moist. He on whom the water hath governance, is said to be cold and moist, that is to say flegmatick. And he on whom the earth raigneth, is said to be melan∣choly, that is to say, cold and dry. Of which complexions more shall be spoken in the beginning of physnomy.

CHAP. XXVIII. A regiment of shepheards of certain things good for the body of man, and of divers other things opposite to the same.

Good for the Braine.

TO smell the savour of muske, and of quibyles, of camomel, to drink wine measurably, not to eat too much sage, to cover thy head, of the washing of thy hands and feet, measurably walking, measurably sleeping, to hear sweet noyses of minstrelsie or singing, to eat mustard and pepper, to smel the red rose, and wash thy temples with water of red roses.

Evill for the brain.

All maner brain of beasts, gluttony, drunkennes, late supper, to sleep much after meat, corrupt ayr, anger, heaviness, to uncover thy head, to eat softly, too much heat▪ too much waking, too much walking, milk, cheese, nuts, to eat ere thou be hungry, bathing after meat, onions, garlick, great noise, to smell to a white rose, and much stirring.

Good for the eyes.

The red rose, vervaine, rew, fenell, Salendin, enfrage, pimpernell, ocu∣li Christi, to plunge thine eyes in clear water, oft to look on green colour, measurable sleep, to look in a fair glasse, oft to wash thy hands and feet, make the stomack well defied, and to look often on gold also.

Evill for the eyes.

Powder, garlick, onions, hunger, leeks, waking, and wind, hot ayr, cold ayr, drunkennesse, gluttony, milk, cheese much beholding of bright things, aswell white as red, mustard, anon to sleep after meat, too much sleeping, too much waking, too much letting of bloud, cole-worts, smoak, all things that is peppered, lechery, and hot fire before the sight evill baken bread, dust, too much weeping, all this is evill for the eyes.

Good for the throat.

Hony, sugar, butter, with a little salt, licoras, to suppe soft egges, Isope, mean manner of eating and drinking, and sugarcandy, this is good for the throat.

Evill for the throat.

Mustard, much lying upon the breast, pepper, anger, all fixed meats, and all things rosted, lechery, much walking, too much rest, much drink, much thirst, much running, smoake of incense, old cheese, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or cold, and all sowre things are naught for the throat.

Good for the heart.

Saffron, borage, laughing, ioy, musk, cloves, Galingale, Nutmegs, the red rose, the violet, sugar, mace, before all other things.

Evill for the heart.

Beans, peason, leekes, garlick, onions, heaviness, anger, dread, too much busines, travell, to drink cold water after labor, evill tidings.

Good for the stomack.

Red mints, red roses, cumin, sugar, sage, wormwood, calamit, to vo∣mit every quarter once, great hunger, every day to stand after meat, and often walking after meales, every cold thing, Galingale, nutmegs, Vine∣ger, Pepper, and measurable sleep,

Evill for the stomack.

All sweet things, for they make the stomack to swell, nuts, old cheese, milk, hony, marrow bones that be not well soden, to eat ere thou be hun∣gry, to eat many sorts of meats at one sitting, to drink or thou be a thirst,

to eat bread that is not well baked and all raw flesh, stinking, heavinesse, & dread thought, over great travell, slooping, falling, and all fried meats, too much bathing after meat, and too much casting, eat when thou art over hot either of fever or travell, all milk of beasts is evill save of Goats.

For ache of the womb.

Take tansie, rew, and sothernwood, and eat it with salt fasting when thou art a fret, and it will do it away.

For to restore the liver.

Take a quantity of wild tansie, and stampe it, and drink it with wine or ale nine dayes or more, and he shall amend.

For fatnesse about a mans heart.

Take the iuyce of fenell and hony, and seeth them both together till that it be hard, and eat it at even and morn, and it shall avoid soon.

For hardnesse of the womb.

Take two spoonfull of the iuyce of Ivy leaves, and drink thereof three times in the day, and thou shalt be whole.

For the wind in the stomack.

Take cumin and beat it to powder, and mingle it with redde wine, and drink it last at night three dayes, and he shall be whole.

For the dropsie.

Take chickweed, clythers, ale, and oat-meal, and make pottage there∣with, and use it nine dayes, and everyday fresh, and he shall be whole.

A good drink for the pestilence.

For the pestilence, take and wash elran a Lilly root and boyl it in white wine, til the one half be wasted, and then give it the sick to drink, and he shall break out full of bladders, as he were burnt or scalded with hot wa∣ter, and they will dry, and the person wax then whole.

CHAP. XXIX Hereafter followeth the four elements, and the four complexions of man, and how, and in what time they reign in man.

AIre, Fire, Earth, and Water. The twenty four houres of the day and the night ruleth sanguin, cholerick, melancholick, and flegmatick. Six houres after midnight bloud hath the mastery, and in the sixe houres afore noon choler reigneth, and six houres after noon raigneth melancholy, and six hours afore midnight reigneth the flegmatick. Thus endeth the four elements, and the four complexions.

CHAP. XXX. Here followeth the governance of health.

WHo will be whole, and keep himself from sick∣nesse, And resist the stroke of pestilence, Let him be glad, and void all heavinesse, Flee wicked ayres, eschue the presence Of infect places, causing the violence, Drinking good wines, of wholsome meats take, Smell sweet things, and for thy defence Walk in clean ayr, and eschue the mists black.

With void stomack outward thee not dresse, Rising up early, with fire have sustain, Delight in gardens, for the great sweetnesse. To be well clad doe thy diligence, Keep well thy self from inconvenience, In stewes ne bathes no soiorne thou make, Opening of the pores, this doth great offence. Walk in clean ayr, and eschue the mists black.

Eat no raw flesh for no greedinesse, And from fruit keep thine abstinence, Pullets and Chickens for their tendernesse Eat thou with sauce, spare for no expence. Veriuice, vineger, and the influence Of wholsome spices I dare undertake, The morrow sleep called golden in sentence, Great helpeth against the mists so black.

For health of body, cover from cold thy head, Eat no raw meats, take good heed hereto, Drink wholesome wine, feed thee on light bread. With an appetite rise from thy meat also. With women aged fleshly have not to doe, Vpon thy sleep, drink not off the cup, Glad toward bed, at morrow both too. And use never late for to suppe.

And if it so be, that leaches to thee fail, Then take good heed to use things three, Temperate diet, temperate travaile, Not malicious, for none adversity, Meek in trouble, gald in poverty. Rich with little, content with suffisance.

[illustration]

Never grudging, merry like thy degree. If physick lack, make this thy governance.

To every tale shew thou no credence, Be not too hasty, ne suddainly vengeable, To poor folke do thou no violence, Curtesie of language, of feeding measurable, On sundry meat not greedy at the table, In feeding gentle, prudence in daliance, Close of tongue, of word not deceiveable, To say the best set alway thy pleasance.

Have in hate mouthes that be double, Suffer at thy table no detraction, Have despight of folk that make trouble, Of false ravenours and adulation, Within thy place suffer no division With thy houshold, it shall cause increase, Of all welfare, prosperity and foyson. With thy neighbors live in rest and peace.

Be cleanly clad after thy estate, Passe not thy bonds, keep thy promise blive. With three folk be not at debate, First with thy better, beware for to strive, Against thy fellow no quarrell to contrive▪ With thy subiect to strive it were shame, Wherefore I counsell, persue all thy life To live in peace, and get thee a good name.

Fire at morrow, and toward bed at Eve, Against mists black, and ayr of pestilence, Betimes at service thou shalt the better chieve, First at thy rising, to God doe reverence. Visit the poor with entire diligence, On all needy have compassion, And God shall send grace and influence, Thee to increase, and thy possession.

Suffer no surfets in thy house at night, Ware of suppers and great excesse, Of nodding heads and candle light.

[illustration]

Of sloth at morrow, and slumbring idlenesse, Which of all vices is chief protectresse. Void all drunkennesse, lyars and letcherous, Of all unthrifty exile the Mistresse. That is to say, dice, playes, and hazardous.

After meat beware, make not too long sleep, Head, foot and stomack preserve aye from cold, Be not too pensive, of thought take no keep. After thy rent govern thy houshold. Suffer in time, in thy right hand behold, Swear none other man to beguile. In youth be lusty, and sad when thou art old. No worldly ioy lasteth but a while.

Dine not at morrow before thine appetite. Clear ayr and walking maketh good digestion. Between meals drink not for no forward delight. But thirst or travell give thee occasion. Over-salt meat doth great oppression To feeble stomackes, when they cannot refrain From thing contrary to their complexion. Of greedy hands the stomack hath great pain.

Thus in two things standeth all thy wealth, Of soul and body, who list them sue▪ Moderat food giveth to man his health, And all surfets then he doth eschue. And charity to soul is due, This receipt bought is of no pothecary, Of master Anthony nor of master Hue. To all indifferent riches di••tary.

[illustration]

Nescio quo certo lenta papavere dormit Mensque creatorem nescit iniqua suum: En iterum toto lingua crucifigitur orbe, En iterum patitur dira flagella deus. Factorem factura suum stimulante tyranno, Dilectis factis deserit orba suis, Inde fames venit, inde discordia regum, Inde cananeis praedatibusque sumus. Inde premit gladius carnalis spiritualem, Et vice conversa spiritualis eum; Hinc subitos Atropos praedatrix occupat artus▪ Nec sinit ut doleat paenitet atque miser. Iure vides igitur quam tecta ligamina nectit, Immundus mundus haec duo verba simul.

Thus endeth the Physick and regiment of health of shepheards.

[illustration]

[illustration]

Coelum caeli Domini, terram autem dedit filiis hominum. Non mortui lauda∣bunt te Domine, neque omnes qui descendunt in infernum. Sed nos qui vivimus benedicemus Domino. Quoniam videbimus coelos tuos opera digitorum tuo∣rum lunam & stellas quae tu fundasti. Quia subjecisti omnia sub pedibus nostris, oves & boves universas, insuper & pecora campi, volucres coeli, & pisces maris. Domine Dominus noster, quam admirabile est nomen tuum in universa terra?

CHAP. XXXI. Here followeth the shepheards Astrology.

WHo that will, as shepheards that keep sheep in the fieldes, without knowing any letter, save only by some figures that they make in little Tables of wood, have knowledge of the movings and properties of the heavens, And divers other things contained in this present compost and Kalender of shep∣heards, the which is extract and composed out of their kalender & put in let∣ters, so that each may comprise & know, as they, things above said. First one ought to know what the figure is, the disposition of the world, the num∣ber and order of the Elements, and the movings of Skies, appertaineth to be known of every man of free condition and noble engin. For it is a fair thing, delectable, profitale and honest, and therewith it is necessary to have divers other knowledges, in especiall, for the Astrology of shep∣heards, which sheweth how the world is round as a ball. And after wise men say there is nothing so round as it. For it is rounder than any thing artificiall. And moreover, in this world we see nothing ne never shall, that is so iust and equall round as it self is, and is composed of the heaven, and the four elements in five princi••all parts. After that, a person ought to know that the earth is in the middle of the world, for it is the heaviest ele∣ment. Vpon the earth is the water or the sea, but it covereth not the earth, to the end that men and beasts may live therein, and the part that is unco∣vered is call'd the face of the earth, for it is as the face of a man alwayes un∣covered, and the part which is covered with water, is as the body of man, which is cloathed & hid. On the water is the ayr, that incloseth the earth & the water, and is divided into three Regions, one is low, whereas inha∣biteth beasts and birds, another mean, whereas been the cloudes, the which maketh the impressions, as lightnings thunder and other, & is alway cold: the third is the highest, whereas is neither wind nor rain, nor tempest, nor other impressions, & there be some mountaines that attain unto it, as is

Olympus, that reacheth the highest region of the ayr, and the element of fire mounteth to the sky, & the elements sustaineth the skies as pillars or beames sustaineth a house. Of such moūtains is one in Af••••c•• named Atlas.

After that is the element of fire, which is neither flame ne coales, but is pure & invisible, for the great brightnesse, for so much as the water is more clear and light than the earth, and the ayr more cleer and light than the water, of so much the fire is more cleer light, and fayrer than ayr, and the skies in equipollent been clearer, lighter, & fairer than the fire, the which turneth with the movings of the heavens, and the next region of the ayr also, in the which is ingendred comets, the which been called starres, for so much as they be shining and move as stars. After the saying of some shepheards, the fire is invisible, for his subtilty, and not for his cleernesse, forasmuch as a thing is more cleer, of so much it is the more visible, for we see the skies well, but not the fire, for it is overmuch more subtile than the ayr that is invisible, for the same cause the earth and the water be thick, and therefore they be visible. The skies be neither properly heavy ne lighht, hard, ne soft, cleer, ne dark, hot, ne cold, sweet, ne soure, colour ne sound, ne such other qualities, save that they be hot in vertue, for they may cause heat here beneath by their lights, movings and influences, and be impro∣perly hard, for they may not be divided, ne broken. And also they be im∣properly colours of light in some parts, and bee thick, as be the partes of the Stars. In the which, there may no star, nor other party be a∣nusted & put to nor none maye be diminished, ne taken away, and they may neither increase, ne wax lesse, nor be of other figure than round, ne they may not change, ne pair, ne wax old, ne be corrupted, ne altered, but in light only, as in tyme of the Eclipse of the Son and Moon, ne they may not rest and stand still, ne turn any other wayes, later ne sooner, in part ne all, ne behave them otherwise, than after their common course, but by miracle divine, and therefore the Stars and skies be of another nature than the elements and the things of them composed, the which be transmutable and corruptible. The Elements and all things of them composed be inclo∣sed within the first skie, as the yolke of an eg is inclosed within the white, and the first skie is inclosed of the second, and the second in the third, and the third in the fourth, and so of the other. The first skie next the elements is the sky of the Moon, next is the sky of Mercury, and next is the sky of Venus, then is the sky of the Sun, then is of Mars, then of Iupiter, and after it of Saturn. And thus be the skies of the planets after their order. The eighth sky, is of the stars fixed and bee called so, for that they move more regularly, and after one guise than the planets doe. Then above, which is the first mobile: in the which nothing appeareth, as shepheards may see.

Some shepheards say, above this ninth skie is one Immobile, for it turneth not, and above that is one of christall, over the which is the sky

imperiall, in the which is the throne of God, of the which sky shepheards ought not to speak, but onely of the first mobile, and that it containeth all together called the world. Of one thing they marvell much, that is, how God hath distributed the stars, that he hath put none in the ninth sky, and hath put so many in the eight sky, that they may not be numbred, and in each of the other seven but one onely, in calling the sun and the moon stars, as appeareth in the figure hereafter.

Hereafter the great master Shepheard sheweth more plainly of the four ele∣ments, and of the similitude of the earth, & how that every planet is one above another, and telleth which of them be masculine, as these five, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sol, and Mercury. And of two feminine as Venus and Luna. And which of them is northerly and southerly, and which be orientall or occidentall.

CHAP. XXXII. Of the movings of the skies and planets.

[illustration]

SOme movings been of the sky and planets that exceed the understanding of shepheards, as the moving of the firmament, in the which been the stars against the first mobile in an hun∣dred yeer one degree, and the moving of the planets in their eclipses, of the which how well the shepheards be not ignorant of all, yet they make no mētion here, for it sufficeth them only of two, wher∣of the one is from orient into occident above the earth, & from occident to the orient, under it, that is called the diurnall moving, that is to say, that it maketh from day to day, xxiiii. howres, by the which moving the ninth Sky, that is the first mobile, draweth after, and maketh the other Skies to turn that be under it. The other moving is of the seven planets, and is from occident to orient above the earth, and from orient into the occident under it, and is contrary to the first, and bee the two movings that

shepheards knowledgeth, and how wel they been opposites yet they move continually, and be passible, as is shewed by example. If a ship on the sea came from orient into occident and that he of his own moving went in the ship softly toward orient, this man should move a double moving, where∣of one should be of the ship and of himself together, and the other should be of his own moving that he maketh softly toward orient. Semblably, the planets be transported with their sky from orient to occident by the diur∣nall moving of the first mobile, but later and otherwise than the fixed stars, by which each planet hath his proper moving, contrary to the moving of the stars, for the Moon maketh a course lesse in a month about the earth, than a star fixed, and the sun a course lesse in a yeer, and the other planets in a certain time, each after the quantity of his movings. Thus it appeareth that the planets move two movings. Some shepheards suppose by imagi∣nation that all the skies ceased to move by the dayly moving, the Moon would make a course in going from the occident into the orient, in as much time as lasteth now xxvii. dayes and eight houres, and Mercury, Venus, and Sol would make in manner course in the space of a yeer, and Mars, in two yeer or there about, and Saturn in thirty yeer or there about. For now they make their course or revolutions, and accomplish their proper movings in the time here named. The proper movings of Planets is not straight from occident to orient, but it is

[illustration]

as sideway, and shepheards see them sensibly, for when they see the moon be∣fore a star one night, the second or third night it is behind, not straight toward orient, but shall be drawed one time toward Septentrion and another time toward midday, and this is because of the latitude of the zodiake, in the which be the xii. signes under whom the Pla∣net reigneth.

CHAP. XXXIII. Of the Equinoctiall and Zodiake that be in the twelve skies, that containeth the firmament under it.

IN the concave of the first mobile▪ shepheards imagin to be the two circles, and they been there royally, the one is as small as a threed, and it is called Equinoctiall, and the other is large in manner of a girdle, or as a garland of flowers which they call the Zodiake, and these two circles divide the one and the other equally, but not straight. For the Zodiak crosseth crookedly, and the places where it crosseth been said Equinoctials. For to understand the Equinoctial, we see sensibly all the sky turn from orient into occident, and it is called the dayly moving or diurnall; then ought one to imagine a straight line that passeth through the middle of the earth, comming from the one end of the sky to the other, about the which line is made this moving, and the two ends be two points in the sky that move not, and be called the poles of the world, of the which one is over us, by the Star of the North, that alwayes appea∣reth unto us, and is the Pole artick or Septentrionall, and the other is under the earth, alwayes hid, called the pole Antartick, or pole Australl, in the middest of the which pole, in the first mobile, is the circle equinoctiall equally before in the part, as in the other of the said poles, and after this circle, is made and measured the daily moving of xxiiii. houres, that is a naturall day, and it is called equinoctiall, for that when the Sun is in it, the day and the night been equall through all the world. The large Zodiake as is said is in the first mobile, also it is as a girdle mannerly figured & set with Images of signes intrailed subtilly and well composed, and set with fixed stars as shining Carbuncle or precious gems full of great vertue, set by the mistris right nobly adorned, in the which Zodiacke be iiii. prin∣cipal points that divide them equally in 4. parts. One is high, called the solstice of summer, which when the Sun is entered in Cancer, it is the long∣est day of summer; another is low, called the solstice of winter▪ which is when the sun is entred in Capricorne, then it is the shortest day of winter, and men call it equinoctiall of harvest, that the Sun entreth in Libra, in the month of September. And the other is called equinoctiall of prime time that the Sun entereth in Aries, in the month of March. The which four parts divided each in 3 equall parts, maketh twelve parts that be called signes, named Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo Libra, Scorpio, Sagittarius, Capricornus, Aquarius, and Pisces Aries beginneth in the Equinoctiall, and crosseth the Zodiacke, and when the sun is there, it be∣ginneth to decline, that is to say, approching Septentrion, and toward us it extendeth to the orient. Then is Taurus second, Gemini the third, and so of other as the figure hereafter sheweth. Also every signe is divided in xxx. degrees, and be in the Zodiacke ccc.••••. degrees, and every degree divided by 60. minutes, every minute in 60. seconds, every second into 60. thirds, and this division sufficeth for shepheards.

CHAP. XXXIV. Here followeth the story of the twelve Signes.

[illustration]

Equinoctium autumni. These lines by the which the sun defendeth of solsti∣ciū of summer, in the solst. of winter. Equinoctium primi tēporis. Their six lines, by the which the sun mounteth of solsticium in winter into the solsticium of summer.

SHepheards know∣ledgeth a subtile variation in the skies, and is for three stars fixed bee not under the same degrees of the zodiack, that they were created, because of the moving of the firmament, the which bee against the first mobile, in an hundred yeer of one degree, for the which mutation the sun may have other regard to a star and other significa∣tion, than it had in the time passed, and also when the books were made▪ for that the star hath hanged his degree or sign un∣der which it was. And this oftentimes causeth them that make prognosticati∣ons and iudgments comming to fail. All the circles of the sky, been narrow and small, except the Zodiack, which is large, and contai∣neth in length three hundred and threescore degrees & of largeness twelve, the which largenesse is divided by the middle, six Degrees one the on sign, and six on the other, and this division is made by a line, named Ecl••ptick, and is the way of the Sun, for the Sun never departeth under that line, & thus it is alway in the midle of the Zodiack▪ but the other planets been al∣wayes on the one side, or of the other of the said line, save when they been in the head or in the tail of the Dragon, as the Moon that passeth twice in a month, and it happen when it reneweth, it is Eclipse of the Sun, and if it happen the full Moon, and that it be right under the nadyr of the Sun, it is generall Eclips, and if it be but a part, it is not seen: when it is eclips

of the Sun, it is not generall through all the climates, but onely in some, but when it is eclipse of the Moon▪ it is generall over all.

Of two great circles, that is to say, one Meridian▪ and the other Orison that intersequeth the one the other, and crosseth directly.

Meridian is a great circle imagined on the sky, which passeth by the poles of the world, and by the point of the sky right over our heads, the which is called Zenith, and when the Sun is come over from Orient unto that circle it is midday, and therefore it is called Meridian, and the half of that circle is over the earth, and the other under it, that passeth by the point of midnight, directly opposite to Zenith and when the Sun toucheth the part of the circle, it is midnight, and if a man goe toward orient or occident, he hath new meridian, and therefore it is sooner midday to them that bee toward Orient, then to other: if a man stand still, his Meridian is one stil▪ or if he goe toward mid-day or septentrion, but if he stirre, he hath other Zenith, and these two circles crosseth directly. Orison is a great circle that divideth the part of the sky that we see, from that we see not. And shep∣heards say, that if a man were in a plaine Country, he should see iustly half of the sky, which they call their emisphery, that is to say, half spheare, & orison is ioyning nigh to the earth, of the which orison, the entry is the middle and is the place in the which we have been: thus each is always in the midst of his orison and Zenith is the pole, and as a man transporteth him from one place to another, he is in the other places against the sky, & hath other Zenith & other Orison, all Orison is right or oblik. They have right Orison that abideth under the Equinoctiall, and have their Zenith in the Equinoctial, for their Orison intersequeth and divideth the Equinocti∣all, even by these two poles of the world, in such wise, that none of the poles of the world is raised above their Orison ne deprived under it, but they that habit other where than under the equinoctiall have their Orison oblike for their Orison followeth and divideth the Equinoctiall side way, and not right, and there appeareth unto them of all times, one of the poles of the world, raised above their Orison, and the other be ever hid, so that they see them not, more or lesse after divers habitations, and after that they be of farnesse from the Equinoctiall, and the more that the one pole is raised, the more the orison oblike, and the other pole deprived▪ & is to wit, that there is as much distance from the Orison to the pole, as from the Zenith to the Equinoctiall, and that Zenith is the fourth part of Meridian, or the middest of the bow diurnall, of the which the two ends be on the Orison. And also that of the Pole unto the Equinoctiall, is the fourth part of all the roundnesse of the skies and also of the Meridian circle, sith it passeth by the poles, and crosseth the Equinoctiall directly. Example of the Orison of Paris after the opinion of shepheards, over the which Orison they say

that the pole is raised 49. degrees, wherefore they say also, that from the Zenith of Paris unto the equinoctiall bee 49. degrees, and that from the orison unto the Zenith is the fourth part of the Meridian circle, bee xc. degrees, and from the pole to the Zenith be x••i. degrees, and from the pole unto the solstice of summer be lxii degrees, and from the solstice unto the equinoctiall be 32. degrees, there be from the pole unto the equinoctiall 50. degrees, and is the fourth part of the roundnesse of the sky: from the equi∣noctiall unto the solstice of winter be 33. degrees▪ and from the solstice unto the orison ••8. Thus shall the equinoctiall be raised over the orison 12. de∣grees, and the solstice of summer 63 degrees, in the which solstice is the Sun at the hour of noon the longest day of summer, and then it entreth into Cancer, and is most neerest to our habitable parts, that may be. And when the Sun is in the solstice of winter, the shortest day of the yeer at the hour of noon, it entereth into Capricornus, and the said solstice is not raised over the orison of Paris, but 8. degrees. The which elevations and risings a man may find plainly, so that he know one only, and in every region in like wise after the situation.

Of the two other great circles of the sky, and four small.

TWo great circles be on the sky, named colures, divideth the skies in four equall parts, and crosseth their self directly, the one passeth by the poles of the world, and by the two solstices, and the other by the poles also, and by the two equinoctials. The first small Circle is called the Circle Artik, because of the pole Zodiak about the pole Artik, and his like is to his opposite, named the Circle Antartik. The other two be named Tro∣pikes, the one of Summer, and the other of Winter. The Tropik of sum∣mer is cause of the solstice of summer, beginning of Cancer, and the Tropik of winter of the solstice of winter, beginning of Capricorn, and be equally distant one Circle from the other. Here ought to be noted, that the distances of the pole artik to the Circle artik, and the distance of the Tropik of sum∣mer to the equinoctiall, and that of equinoctiall to the Tropik of winter, and from the Circle antartik to the pole antartik, are iust equall, each of 24. degrees & a half or there about, then the distance from the equinoctiall to the tropik of summer, and from the Circle artik to the pole, make to∣gether 47. degrees. The which take away of the quarter between the pole and the equinoctiall, whereas be xc. degrees, save that there abideth 44. that be the distance between the tropik of Winter, and the Circle antar∣tik, and these Circles be said little, for they be not so great as the other, neverthelesse they be divided each by CCClx. degrees as the greatest.

CHAP. XXXV. Of the rising and resconsing of the signs in 〈…〉〈…〉.

ORison and hemisphery differed, for orison is the circle that di∣videth the part of the sky which we see, from that under the earth we see not. Also orison is a circle that moveth not, but as we move from one p••ace to another, but hemisphery turns continually, for one part riseth & mounteth over orison, and the other part resconseth and entereth under it: thus orison riseth ne resconceth. Meridian also riseth not ne resconceth. Equinoctiall is the diurnall circle, that riseth and resconceth regularly, as much in one hour as in another, and all in 23. hours. Zodiake the large circle and ob∣like, whereon the signs be, riseth and resconceth all on a day naturall, but not regularly, for it riseth more in one hour than in another, for that is ever over our orison is oblike and divideth the zodiake in two parts, whereof one is over our orison, and the other underneath. Thus half of the signes riseth over our orison every day artificially, be it short or long, and the other half by night, wherefore it behoveth, that in daies which be shorter then the nights, the signes riseth sooner, and in long dayes more at leasure, and thus the zodiake riseth not regularly in these parts as the equinoctiall, but there is double variation, for half of the zodiacke, that is from the begin∣ning of Aries unto the end of Virgo, altogether taketh as much time in ri∣sing, as half the equinoctiall that is by it, and they begin to rise in a mo∣ment, and end in a moment also. But this half of the zodiake riseth sooner in the begining, and this half of the equinoctiall more at leasure, and this is called their obliquement. Also the other half of the zodiake, that is from the beginning of Libra unto the end of Pisces, and half of the equi∣noctiall that is by it, beginneth and loveth to rise together, but the equi∣noctiall in that part in the beginning riseth sooner, and the zodiake more at leasure, and this is called rising directly. And whether that riseth sooner the equinoctiall or the zodiake, yet allwayes they end together. Example of the two movings afore said, as if two men went from London to Wind∣sore, and departed both together, and that at the beginning the one goe fast and the other softly, he that goeth fast should be sooner in the midway then the other, but if he that went fast to the midway go softly and the other fast, they shall be both at once in Windsore. Also the half of the zodiake from the beginning of Cancer, unto the end of Sagittary, in rising beares more than half of the Equinoctiall, so that this half riseth all right, and the other half of the zodiake riseth oblikely.

CHAP. XXXVI. Of the divisions of the earth, and of the Regions.

[illustration]

FIrst, ere we speak of the stars, and knowledge that shepheards have, we will say of the division of the earth, and of the parts after their opinion. Wherefore it is to be noted that the earth is round, and therefore as a man goes from one country to another, he hath other orison then he had, and there ap∣peareth other part of the sky, and if a man went from septentrion strait toward midday, the pole artike to him shall be lesse raised, that is to say, more nigh approching to the earth, and if he went contrarywise it should be more raised, that is to say, appearing higher, and therefore if he went toward midday under a me∣ridian wheel, that the pole artike were lesse raised over his orison by the 30. part of one of the vi. parts, of the Arke Meredian, he should passe the 30. part of the 6. parts of half the circuit on the earth, and to him the pole should be lesse raised by one degree, or to the contrary, till it were more raised of one degree, then he should passe one degree of the circuit of the earth, of the which all the degrees together be ccc.lx. And one degree of the earth con∣taineth 12. leagues and an half or there about, and every league is 2. mile. And as the speare of the sky is divided by the four lesse circles, five partes called Zones, so the earth is divided into five regions whereof the first is between the pole artike, and the circle artike. The second is between the circle artike and the tropike of summer. The third is between the tropike of summer & the tropike of winter. The fourth is between the tropike of win∣ter, and the circle Antartike. The fift between the circle antartike, and the pole antartike. Of which parts of the earth some shepheards say, that the first and the fift be inhabitable for their over great coldnesse, for they be too far from the Sun. The third is in the middle, is too near, under the way of the Sun, and is inhabitable for the great heat. The other two parts the second and the fourth, be neither too near, ne too far from the Sun, but be moderate in heate and cold, and therefore they be inhabitable if there be no other letting: and suppose it be true, yet it is not impossible to passe overthwart the region under the way of the Sun, called Zone, turned to go from the second to the fourth. For some shepheards would have pas∣sed which would have shewed it, wherefore they say that there is no region habited but the second wherein we and all other be.

CHAP. XXXVII. Of the variation that is for divers habitations and Regions of the earth.

SHepheards say, that if it were possible that the earth were inhabited all about, and pose the case that it were so, first they that inhabit under the Equinoctiall have alwayes the dayes and the nights equall, and have the two poles of the world, at the 2. corners of the orison, and may see all the stars, when they see the two poles, and the sun passeth twice a year over them, that is, when it passeth by the equinoctials. Thus the sun is to them the one half of the yeer toward the pole artick, and the other half toward the other pole, and therefore they have two winters in a yeer without great cold; one is, when we have winter, and the other when we have summer. Semblably they have two Summers, one in March, when we have prime time, and the other in September, when we have harvest, and by this they have four solstices, two high, when the sun passeth by their zenich, and two low, when it declineth one way or other, and thus they have four umbres or shadowes in a yeer, for when the sun is in the equinocts twice in the yeer▪ in the morning their shadowes be in the occident, and at night in the orient, and then at noon they have no shadowes, but when the Sun is in the signes septentrionals, their shadowes be toward the parts of the signes meridiona••s, and so againward Secondly, they that inhabit be∣tween the equinoctiall and the Tropike o•• summer, have in like wise two summers, and two winters, and four shadowes in a yeer, and they have no difference of the first, save that they have longer dayes in summer, and shorter in winter, for as the Equinoctiall lengtheneth, so likewise doth the dayes in summer, and in that part of the earth is the first climate, and al∣most half of the second, & is named Araby, wherein is Ethiopia. Thirdly they that inhabit under the Tropike of summer, have the Sun over their heads: and at the day of the solstice of Summer at noon, they have their shadowes smaller then we have, and there is a part of Ethiopia Fourthly, they that be between the tropike of summer, and the circle Artike have longer daies in summer then the above said, in as much as they be further from the Equinoctiall, and shorter in winter, and they have the sun over their heads, ne toward septentrion, and that part of the earth we inhabit. Fiftly, they that inhabit under the circle Artike, have the eclyptike of the Zodiake to their orison, and when the sun is in the solstice of summer it re∣sconceth not, and thus they have no night but naturall dayes of 24. hours. Semblably when the Sun is in the solstice of winter, it is natural day when they have continuall night▪ and that the Sun riseth not to them. Sixtly, they that be between the Circle artike, and the pole artike have in summer divers natural dayes, that be to them one day artificial without any night. And in winter be many naturall daies, which are to them alwayes night, & the more that it approcheth the pole, the more is the artificial day all sum∣mer long, and dureth in some place a week, in other a month in other two, in other three, in other more, & proportionally the night is greater, for some of the signes be ever on their orison, and some alwayes under, and as long

as the Sun is in the signes above, it is day, and while it is in the signs un∣derneath, it is night. Seventhly, they that inhabit right under the Pole, have the Sun half of the year on their horison, and have continuall day, and the other half of the year continuall night, and the equinoctiall is in their orison that divideth the signes six above & six beneath wherefore when the sun is in the signes that be high, and toward them, they have continual day, and when it is in the signes toward midday they have continual night, and thus in a year they have but one day and one night. And as it is said of that part of the earth toward the pole Artick, a man may understand of the other half, and of the habitations toward the pole Antartick.

The division of the earth and of the parts inhabited.

SHepheards and other, as they divide the earth inhabitable in 7. parts, that they call climates. The first Diamerous. The second Climate Diaciens. The third Dalixandry. The fourth, Diathodes. The fift climate Diaromes. The sixt Daboristines. The seventh Diaripheos. Of the which, each hath his longitude determined, and the latitude also, and the nearer they be to the Equinoctiall, the longer they be, and larger, and proceed in longitude from orient to occident, and in latitude, from midday to Septentrion. The first climate after some shepheards containeth in length half the circuit of the earth, that is, two hundred thousand & 4 hun∣dred mile, & it hath a hundred thousand & two hundred mile of length. The second, and so of the other, for the lessening of the earth comming toward Septentrion. To understand what a climate is, after the saying of the shepheards. A climate is a space of earth equally large, whereof the length is from orient to occident, and the breadth is comming from midday, and from the earth inhabitable, toward the Equinoctiall, drawing to septentri∣on, as much as an horologe or clock changeth not. For in earth habitable the clocks change vii. times in the breath of the climates. It is of necessi∣ty to say that they be seaven, and where the variation of horologes is, there is the diversity of climates, howbeit that such variation properly ought to be taken in the midst of the climates, and not in the beginning or end, for the proximity and covenance the one of the other. Also one climate, hath al∣ways a day artificial of summer, shorter or longer then another climate & this day sheweth the difference in the midst of every climate, better than the be∣ginning or end, the which thing wee may sensibly know at eye, and thereby iudge the difference of the climates. And it is to be noted that under the E∣quinoctiall, the dayes and the nights in all times are equal, each of twelve houres, but comming toward septentrion the dayes of summer longeth, and the winter dayes shorteth, and the more that one approcheth sep∣tentrion, the more waxeth the dayes in such wise, that at the five of the last climate the dayes in summer be longer by three houres and an

half, than they be at the begining of the first, and the pole is more raised by 38. degrees. At the beginning of the first climate, the longest day of summer hath 12. houers and xlv. minutes, and in the pole is raised on the orison 12. degrees and xlv minutes, and the midst of the climate, the longest day hath 13. hours, and the pole raised xvi. degrees and the latitude dures unto the longest day of summer that is 13. houres, and xv. minutes, and the pole raised 20. degrees and an half, which largenesse is ccccxl. mile of earth. The second climate beginneth at the end of the first, and the midst is there as the day hath 12. houres and an half, and the pole is raised over the ory∣son 24. degrees and 15. minutes. And the latitude dureth unto three as the longest day hath 13. houres and xlv. minutes, and the pole is raised xxxii. degrees and an half, and this largenesse containeth of earth CCCC. miles iust. The third climate beginneth at the end of the second, and the midst is there as the day hath 13. houres, and the pole is raised 30. degrees and xlv minutes, and the latitude extendeth unto there as the longest day hath 14. houres, and xv minutes, and the pole is raised 23. degrees, and xi. minutes. The fourth climate at the end of the third, and the midst is there as the longest day hath 24. houres and an half, and the pole is raised 26. degrees and 20. minutes, the latitude dureth unto there as the longest day hath 13. houres, and xlv. minutes, and the pole is raised 30. degrees, and the laregnesse containeth of earth ccc. mile. The fift climate at the end of the fourth, and the midst is there as the longest day hath 15. houres, and the pole is raised 4••. degrees and 20. minutes, and the latitude dureth unto there as the longest day hath 15. houres, and 15. minutes, and the pole is raised 44. degrees and an half, and the largenesse containeth of earth CClii. mile. The sixt climate at the end of the fift, and the midst is there as the longest day hath 15. houres and an half, and the pole is raised over the orizon xlv. degrees and 23. minutes, of which the largenesse dureth unto there as the longest day hath 15. houres and xlv minutes, which largenesse containeth of earth CCxii. mile. The seventh climate at the end of the sixt, and the midst is there as the longest day hath xvi. houres, and the pole is raised 48. degrees and xl. minutes, the latitude extendeth unto there, as the longest day hath 16. hours and 15. minutes, and the pole is raised fifty degrees and an half, and the largenesse of the earth containeth 186. mile.

A marvellous consideration of the great understanding of shepheards.

IF case were after the length of the climates, one might goe about the earth from Orient to Occident to his first place, some shepheards say that this compasse may almost bee made. Saying that if a man went this compasse in 12. naturall dayes, going regularly toward Occident, and

began now at midday, he should passe every day naturall, the twelfth part of the circuit of the earth, and be 20. degrees, whereof it behoveth that the Sun make a course about the earth, and 30. degrees further or he be re∣turned on the morrow at the meridian of the said man, and so the said man should have his day and night of 26. houres, and should bee further by the twelfth part of a naturall day than if he rested him, wherefore it followeth of necessity, that in twelve naturall days the sayd man should only have but 11. dayes and 11. nights, and somewhat lesse, and that the Sun should light him but eleven times, & resconce eleven times, for eleven dayes, and eleven nights, every day & night of 26. hours make 12. naturall dayes, each day of 24. houres. In like manner it behoveth that another man should make this course going toward Orient have his day and night shorter than a naturall day by 2. houres, then his day and night should bee but of 22. hours, then if he made this course in like space, to wit, in twelve days and somewhat more. Thus if John made the course toward occident, and Peter toward orient, and that Robert abode them at the place whence they depar∣ted the one as soon as the other, and they meet at Robert both together. Pe∣ter would say he had 2 dayes and 2. nights more than John, and Robert who had rested a day lesse than Peter, and a day more than John, howbeit they have made this course in 12. naturall dayes, or an hundred, or in 10. yeers all is one. This is a pleasant consideration among shepheards how John and Peter arive one self day, put case it were on sunday: John would say it is Saturday, Peter would say munday, and Robert would say Sunday.

CHAP. XXXVIII. Of the Pomell of the skies, a star named the star of the North, neare the pole Artike called Septentrionall.

AFter the abovesaid things, here will we speak of some stars in parti∣cular. And first of them that shepheards call the pomell of the skies, or star of the North wherefore we ought to know, that we see sensibly the sky turne from Orient to Occident, by the diurnall moving, that is, of the first mobile, which is made on two points opposites, which be the poles of the sky, of the which one we see, and it is the pole Artike▪ and the other wee see not, which is the pole Antartike or of midday which is alway hid under the earth. By the pole Artike, which is the star most approched, which shep∣heards call the pomell of the sky, the which they say is the highest and most stedfast from us, by the which they have the knowledge they have of other stars, and parts of the sky. The stars which be by the said pomell, goe ne∣ver under the earth, of the which be the stars which make the Chariot and divers other, but they who be far from it, goe sometime under earth, as the Sun, the Moon, and other planets. Vnder this pomell directly, is the angle of the earth, in the place where-against the sun is at the houre of midnight.

Of Andromeda, a star fixed.

Aries is a signe hot and dry, that governeth the head of man & the face, and the regions, Babylon, Percy and Araby. And signifieth small trees, and under him at the 16. degree, riseth a star fixed, named Andromeda, that shepheards figureth a maid in her hair, upon the brink of the sea, set to be devoured of the monster of the sea, but Perseus son of Jupiter, fought with his sword against the said monster, and slew it: and so the said Andromeda was delivered. They that be born under her constellation, be in danger of prison, or to die in prison, but if a good planet take regard, they scape both death and prison. Aries is the exaltation of the Sun at the 20. degree, and Aries is the house of Mars, with Scorpio where he is most.

Of Perseus, a star fixe••, Lord of the sphere.

Taurus hath the trees, plants, and impes and governeth of man the neck and the throat bol, the regions Ethiopy, Egypt, and the country about, and under the 22. degree riseth a star fixed of the first magnitude, that shep∣heards call Perseus son of Jupiter, that smot off the head of Meduse, who made al them to die that beheld her, and by no manner they might eschue it. Shepheards say that when Mars is conioyned with this star, they that be born under the constellation shall have their heads smitten off, if God shape not remedy, and sometime they call this star Lord of the sword, and figure him a man naked, with a sword in one hand and in the other the head of Meduse, and looketh on it. And Taurus is the exaltation of the moon in the third degree.

Of Orison, a star fixed, and his fellows,

Gemini signifieth large, good courage, wit, beauty, clergy, and governeth of man the shoulders, armes and hands, and the regions. Iugen, Armony, Carthage, and hath the small trees, and under the 18. degree riseth a star fixed, named Orison, and with it 36. other stars, and is figured a man armed in maile, and a sword girt about him, and signifieth great Captains. They that be born under the constellation be in danger to be slain by trea∣son, if good fortune be not with them. Gemini and Virgo be the houses of Mercury, but Virgo is it in which he ioyeth most, and Gemini in the third degree is the exaltation of the Dragons head.

Of Alhabor, a star fixed.

Cancer domineth the long and equall Trees, and of the body of man the brain, the heart, the stomack, the side, the lights, and the lungs. The Re∣gions, Armony the little, and the Region of Orient. And there riseth under it in the eight degree, a star fixed, which Shepheards call Alhabor, that is to say, the great dog, and they say they that be born under the constellation, and that be in the ascending or the middest of the sky, it signifieth good for∣tune, and if the moon be with it, and the party of fortune, he that in it shall be born shall not be very rich, and Cancer is the house of the Moon, and is the exaltation of Iupiter in the 15. degree.

Of a star fixed, named the Lions heart.

Leo hath the great trees, that is to say he signioreth over them, and sig∣nifieth a hasty man full of anger, and of anguish, and of the body of man it beholdeth the heart properly, the back and the sides, and of regions Artitry to the end of the earth habitable, and under the 34. degree ariseth a star fix∣ed, named the Lions heart, and they that be born under the constellation, as shepheards say, shalbe mounted in his signiories, or in great offices, and afterward shalbe deprived or put down, and be in danger of their lives, but if some good planet behold the said star they may be saved. Leo is the house of the Sun, and Aries is the exaltation of the Sun, as it is said.

Of the star fixed named Nebuluse, and of another named the Golden Cup.

Virgo governeth all that is sown on earth, and signifieth a man of good courage, philosophy, largesse, and of all manner of sciences, and keepeth of man the belly and the intrails, and the regions of Algeramita, Assen a region by ••erusalem, Euphrates and the Ile of Spain. Vnder the longitude or 5. degree riseth a star fixed named Nebuluse or tail of the Lyon, and is in the septentrionall latitude of the said signe of Virgo under the which signe riseth another fixed star, which Shepheards call the Golden cup, and is in the 1. degree of the said signe, toward the part merydionall. The which star is of the nature of Venus and Mercury, and signifieth that they which bee born under the said constellation do know things worthy and sacred.

Of the Porkeespike a star fixed.

Vnder the signe of Libra that domineth the great Trees, and signifieth Iustice, and of man it governeth the reines and the nether part of the bel∣ly, and regions the Country of Romany and of Greece. Vnder the 18. de∣gree riseth a star fixed that shepheards call Porke espike. They that been born under the constellation been wel shaped▪ and been honest, and do things that folk marvell on and reioyceth, and signifieth riches by honesty, and precious marchandise, and bee commonly loved of Lords and Ladies: and Libra is one of the houses of Venus, and Taurus the other, in the which she reioyceth most, and is the exaltation of Saturn, for the weather beginneth to wax cold in this month of September, and Saturn is the planet and Lord of cold, that exalteth when hee entreth into the signe of Libra.

Of the Crown septentrionall, a star fixed,

The Scorpion domineth the trees that be of longitude and largenesse, and signifieth falsenesse, and of the body of man governeth the privy places and the regions of Heberget, and the fields of Araby; in the second degree riseth a star that shepheards call the Crown septentrionall, the which when it is in the ascending in the middest of the sky, giveth honour and exaltation to them that be born under the constellation, and specially when it is wel

beholden of Sol, the Scorpion is one of the houses of Mars, in the which he reioyceth most, and Aries is the other and is the signe wherein Mars beginneth to fall from his exaltation.

Of the Scorpions heart, a star fixed.

The Sagittary signifieth a man full of engin and wise, and governeth the thighs of man, and regions Ethiopy, Maharobem, and Anych. Vn∣der his first degree riseth a star fixed of the first magnitude, the which shep∣heards call the Scorpions heart, which when it is well beheld of Iupiter or Venus, it raiseth them that be born under his constellation to great ho∣nors and riches, but when it is evill beholden of Saturn or of Mars, it putteth them that be born under it to poverty▪ The Scorpion is the house of Iupiter, in the which he reioyceth most, and Pisces is his other house, and so is the said Sagittary, the exaltation of the Dragons tail.

Of the flying Eagle a star fixed.

Capricornus signifieth a man of good life, wise, irefull, and of great thought, and governeth the knees of man▪ and the regions, Ethiope, Araby Gehamen, and to the two seas, and under his 18. degree, riseth a star that Shepherdes call the flying Eagle, that signifyeth the Soveraign Emperors and kings. They that be born under his constellation, when they be well beholden of the Sun and Iupiter, mounteth in great seignories, and bee loved of Kings and Princes. Capricornus and Aquarius be the houses of Saturn, but he reioyceth in Aquary most, and the said Capricornus is the exaltation of Mars.

Of the fish meridionall a star fixed.

Vnder Aquarius, that keepeth the legs of a man to the ancles of the feet, and the regions of Hazenoch, Atempha, and part of the land of Alphage, and part of Egypt, in the 21. degree riseth a star that shepheards call the fish Meridionall. They which be born under his constellation be happy in fish∣ing in the sea at midday, and under the 9. degree of the said signe riseth the Dolphin that signifieth Lordship on the sea, ponds, and rivers, and as is said, Aquarius is the house of Saturn, in the which he reioyceth.

Of Pegasus that signifieth the horse of honor a star fixed.

Pisces governeth of man the feet, and signifieth a man subtile, wise, and of divers colours, and hath regions, Tabrasen, Iurgen, and all the habi∣table part that is septentrion, and part of Romany, and under the 15. degree of the said sign, riseth a star that shepheards call Pegasus, that is the horse of honor, and the figure in form of a fair horse. They that be born under his constellation, shall be honored among great Captaines and Lords. When Venus is with it, they bee loved of great Ladies, if the said star be in the middest of the sky in the descending, and Pisces is one of the houses of Iupiter, and Sagittarius the other, in the which he reioyceth most, and the said Pisces in the 27. degree is the exaltation of Venus.

CHAP. XXXIX. Of the division of the 12. houses, as well in the earth as in the heaven.

[illustration]

THe heavens and the earth may be divided in four parts by two circles which crosse directly over the two poles, and crosseth four times the Equinoctiall line. Each of the four parts divided into three equally, is in all 12. equall parts, as well in the sky as in the earth, which shepheards call houses, and be twelve. Of the which six be alwayes above the earth, and six under it, and these houses move not, but be always each in their place, and the signes and planets passeth by them always once in four and twenty hours. Three of these houses be from Orient to mid-night going under the earth, the first, second, and the third, whereof the first under the earth beginneth at Orient named the house of life. The second house of substance and riches. The third that finisheth at mid-night is the house of fraternity. The fourth that beginneth at mid-night comming in Occident, is named the house of patrimony. The fift following is the house of sons. The sixt finisheth in Occident under the earth, is the house of sicknesse. The seventh beginneth in Occident on the earth, and stretcheth towards mid-day, and is the house of marriage. The eight is the house of death. The ix. finishing at mid-day, is called the house of faith, of religion, and pilgrimage. The tenth beginning at mid-day comming towards Orient is the house of honor and regality. The eleventh after that is the house of true friends.

And the twelfth that finisheth in orient on the earth is named the house of charity, but this matter is difficile, for shepheards knowledging the nature and property of every of the said twelve houses, and departeth them light∣ly, and sufficeth of that is said with the figure present.

Qualiter puer crescit in ventre matris suae. Primo mense crescit cerebrum; Se∣cundo crescunt venae; Tertio & quarto habebit omnia membra sua, sed erit sine anima; Quinto incipit venire & multum gravabit matrem suam; Sexto circun∣dabitur pelle, & ossa crescent. Septimo ungues crescent; Octavo crescit cor & omnia viscera praeter jecur; Nono sciet mater si puer poterit bene nasci an non; Decimo crescit jecur in puero, de tunc bene comparebit mulieri si bene eveni∣et & puero, an non, quae in jecore crescat: quod quam cito habuit jecur tam cito nascetur vel morietur.

In quibus partibus corporis hominis sunt spiritus & intellectus. Intellectus di∣citur essein fronte; Memoria in cerebro, Ira in felle, Avaricia in jecore, Timor in corde, halitus in pulmone; cogitatio in venis, quia splene ridemus, felle irasci∣mur, corde sapimus, jecore amamus: quibus quatuor elementis constantibus integrum est animal.

Of the twelve signes, which be good or bad to take journeys by land or water.

ARies is good, Taurus is not so, Gemini and Cancer will make thee glad; But beware hardly of Leo and Virgo. Libra for friendship, full hard is Scorpio. Sagittary good, Capricorn perillous, Aquary by water good, Clarks proveth so, For best is Pisces, and most plenteous.

CHAP. XL. How the Planets reign in every hour.

HE that will weet how shepheards know which planet reigneth eve∣ry hour of the day, and night: which planet is good, & which is bad, ought to know the planet of the day and seek therefore The first tem∣porall hour of the Sun rising, that day is for the said planet. The second hour is for the planet ensuing, & the third for the other as they are here figured by order, and it behoveth to go from Sol to Venus, Mercury & Luna them come again to Saturn, unto 12. that is the hour before the Sunnes going down: and incontinent after the Sun is down, beginneth the first hour of the night that is for the xiii planet, and the 2. hour of the night for the 14. and so unto 12. hours for the night, that is the nexte hour before the Sun rising and come directly falling upon the 24. planet, that is next before that of the day following. And thus the day hath 12. hours, and the night 12. also, the which be temporall hours, different to the hours of the clocks, the which be artificials. Shepheards say, that Saturn and Mars

[illustration]

be evill planets. Iupiter and Venus good, Sol and Luna half good, and half evill. The party toward a good planet is good, and the party toward the evill planet is naught. Mercury conioyned with a good planet is good, and with an evill planet he is naught, and they understand this as to the influences good or evill, that been of the said planets there following.

The houres of the planets been different to them of clocks, for the hours of clocks been equall at all times each of lx. minutes, but they of the planets when the dayes and the nights be equall that the Sun is in one of the E∣quinocts, they be equall, but as soon as the dayes lengthen or shorten, so do the naturall houres. By this it is convenient alway for the day to have 12. temporall houres, and the night also, and when the days be long, and the houres long, and when the dayes be short, and the houres short, in like manner is the night, and neverthelesse an hour of the day, and an hour of the night together have six score minutes, as many as two hours for ar∣tificials, that the one leaveth the other taketh. And take we our planets from the Sun rising, not before, unto the Sun going down, and all the remnant is night.

Example of that which is above.

[illustration]

In December the days have but vii. hours artifi∣cials of clocks, & xii tem∣porals, let the viii. hours artificials be divided in 12. equall parts and it shalbe 12. times, xl. minutes, and every part shalbe a tempo∣rall hour that shalbe of xl. minutes and no mo. Thus in December the temporal hours of the day have but xl minutes, but the hours of the night have fourscore for in that time the nights have xvi. hours artificials, which divided in 12. parts bin fourscore minutes for every tēporall hour. Thus the hour of the nights in Decemb. have 80. minuts, and xl. for an hour of the day: there been six sore mi∣nutes in two temporall hours, as many in two hours artificialls that be each of xl minutes. In Iune is the contrary, in March, and in September, all hours been equall as the dayes been in other months by equall portion. With every planet here afore figured been the signs which be the houses of the said planets, as it is aforesaid. Capricornus and Aquarius been the houses of Saturn: Sagittarius and Pisces, of Iupiter: Scorpio and Aries, of Mars: Leo, of Sol: Taurus and Libra, of Venus: Gemini, of Mercury: Cancer of Luna, with other significations that would be long to recount.

Hereafter followeth the nature of the seven planets, with the dispositions of the said Planets, after the sayings of expert shepheards.

My son, thou shalt understand, That to avoid all idlenesse, This matter oft thou take in hand. To read of shepheards businesse. And specially of the Planets seven, Of Mars, and Saturn that is full high, Also of Sol the middle heaven. And under him Venus, Luna and Mercury.

For to know their natures all, In sooth it is a great cunning, And shew what may befall, When every planet is reigning; By their working, oft we been moved To love, lust, and playes of iollity, And by some of them, as Clarkes have proved, They stir us to theft, murther and utily. Some be not good, some be bad veryly, Some be not comfortable to man, ne beast, Some hot, some cold, some moist, some dry. If three be good, four be worse at least. Saturn is highest and coldest, being full bad; And Mars with his bloudy sword, ever ready to kill, Iupiter very good, and Venus maketh lovers glad. Sol and Luna is half good and half ill. Mercury is good and evill verily: And hereafter shalt thou know, Which of the seven most worthy be, And who reigneth high, and who low. Of every planets property, Which is the best among them all, That causeth wealth, sorrow or sin, Tarry, and hear soon thou shalt. Speak soft, for now I begin.

Of Saturn.

[illustration]

Saturnus significat hominem nigrum & croceum, ambulando vergentem in terra qui ponderosus est, incessu adjungens pedes, & macer, recurvus, habens parvos oculos, siccam cutem, barbam raram, labia spissa, calidus, ingeniosus, seductor, interfector, homi∣nemque corpore pilosum junctis superciliis.

[illustration]

Here beginneth of Saturne, the highest of the seven Planets.

SAturne is the highest planet of all the seven, he is mighty of himself he giveth all the great colds and waters, yet he is dry and cold of nature, and he comes into Cancer, and his cheife signes be Aquary and Capricorn, and he compasseth all the other planets: for Saturne is next under the first mobile▪ that is, under the sky, which mobile moveth marvellously, for some shephards say that hee causeth by his moving all other planets to move, and moveth the mobile above.

Saturne is so high that the shepheards cannot wel measure it, for so high reason hath power and no further, and therefore it is more then 30. years ere he may run his course. When he reigneth there is much theft used, and little charity, much ••ying, and much lawing one against another, and great prisonment much debate and great swearing. And much plenty of corn & Hogs, great travell on the earth, and old folk shall be very sickly, many diseases shall reigne among the people, especially in the chiefe hours of Saturne, therefore this planet is likened to age, as hard, hungry, suspitious, and covetous, that seldome is content with any thing, for Saturn is enemy to all things that grow and beare life of nature, for the cold and stormy bitternesse of his time.

Of his properties.

HE that is born under Saturn shalbe false, envious, & ful of debate, and full of law, he shalbe cunning in currying of leather, and a great eater of bread & flesh, hee shall have a stinking breath, and he shall be heavy, thoughtfull, and malicious, a robber a fighter, and full covetous & yet he shall keep counsell wel, and be wise in councelling, and he shal love to sin wilfully, he shall be a great speaker of tales, iusts, and Chronicles, he shall have little eies, black hair, great lips, broad shouldred, and shall look downward. He shall not love Sermons, ne go to the Church, and beware of his s••••nds, and behold the ratel, and above his eares the planet raignes. The children of Saturne shall be great ••angelers and chiders, blacke and lean in the face, thin bearded, evill languaged, they shalbe full of Law and vengeance, and will never forgive til they be revenged of their quarrell, and like as the planet Saturn is cold, and a great causer of Frosts and Snowes, semblably, and he that is born under him shalbe cold in charity, and not mi∣sericordious but vengable & will never be entreated. Also they shalbe great cursers, and beare malice long in their minds, and not forget it, they looke to be obeyed, and to have great reverence, and commonly will praise them∣selves, and talke to himself, and laugh at their own conceit, and all evills shall grow in them, and above al colours he shal love black best. The planet of Saturne governs of man the ratle, and above the eares as is aforesaid. This planet is cause of hasty death, because he is cold & dry of nature, and therefore is likened to melancholly. And the said Saturn reigneth in Aquary, Capricorn and Cancer, but specially in Aquary and Capricorne.

[illustration]

Jupiter significat hominem habentem album ru∣borem in facie, habentem oculos non prorsus nigros nares non equares & breves calvum, in aliquo den∣tium habentem nigridinem, pulchre statuere, boni animi, bonis moribus, pulchris corporis, hominem{que} habentem magnos oculos, pupillam latam barbam crispam.

NExt after the planet of cold Saturn is the noble planet of Iupiter, which Iupiter is very pure and cleer of nature, and not very hot, but he is all vertuous: And there is fixed in Iupiter two noble signes of love, the one is Pisces, and the other is Sagittar, signes of none evil, nor unhappiness▪ This planet may do none evil, he is best of all the other seven he keepeth the liver of man, and maintaineth it ioyously, and ever more this planet doth good, and within twelve yeers or thereabout he passeth all the twelve signes.

Of his properties.

THe man that is born under him shall love cleanlinesse of body, and will not use to speak of ribaldry and harlotry, he shall ever love religion, and vertuous living, he shall be personable of body, he shall be perfect in all maner of measures, both large and long, he shalbe white in the visage min∣gled with a little rednesse, large browes, he shalbe a faire speaker, and say well behind a person, he shall love green colour and gray, he shalbe happy in merchandise, and shall have plenty of gold and silver, & he shal love to sing and to be honestly merry: and of man he governeth the stomack and the armes.

Of Mars.

THe planet of Mars is called the God of battle and of war and he is the third planet, for he raigneth next under the gentle planet of Iupiter. This planet Mars is the worst of all other, for he is hot & dry, & stir∣reth a man to be very wilfull and hasty at once, and to unhappiness, one of his Signes is Aries, and the other is Scorpio, and most he is in these two signes. He causeth all wars and battells, this planet stirreth men to bear weapons, as murtherers, daggers, swords, hilts or bowes, or some

[illustration]

Mars significat hominem rubeum, habentem ca∣pillos ruffos & faciem ortundam, leviter homines die honestantem, habentem oculos croceos, horri∣bilis aspectus audacem, habentem in pede signum velmaculum, hominemque ferocem habentem acu∣tum aspectum superbiam levitatem & audacem.

other weapon of death, and would ever heare of fighting. Therefore let every man beware of the dayes of Mars, and in his cheife houres that no man fight, for without doubt if God help him not, he shall be maimed or slaine. Also the hours of Mars is perillous meeting with theeves for dread of slaying of true men. And Mars mounteth into the crabbe, and goeth about the twelve signes in two yeer, and thus runneth his course.

Of his properties.

HE that is born under Mars, in all unhappinesse is expect, he shall be a nourisher of great Beasts, he is full of malice, & ever doing wrong, under Mars is born all theeves & robbers that keepeth high wayes, and hurteth true men, and night walkers quarell pickers, mockers, and scoffers, and these men of Mars cause war, murther, and battle, they will gladly be Smiths or workers of Iron, light fingers, and lyars, and great swearers of oathes in vengeable wise, and a great surmiser and crafty, he is red and angry, with black hair and little eies, he shallbe a great walker, and a maker of swords & knives, and shedder of mans bloud, a letcher, a speaker of ribaldry, red bearded round visage, and good to be a barber and letter of bloud, and to draw teeth, and is perillous of his hands, and he wil be rich of other mens goods. And of the body of man Mars keepeth the gall and the reines.

Of the noble planet Sol.

THe sun is a planet of great renown and king of all the planets, the sun nourisheth every age, & yet he is hot and dry of nature, and the planet Saturn is to him full contrary, for he is ever cold▪ and the noble planet of the sun is hot, and giveth all light, for when it is above the earth, it is day

[illustration]

Sol significat hominem habentem colorem inter croceum & nigrum, id est fuscum, tectum cum rubo∣re, brevis statuere, crispum crinem, pulchri corporis, capillos, parum rubeos: occulos aliquantulum croce∣os, & mixtam habet naturam cum planeta qui cum eo fuerit dum modo digniorem habeat locum ejus insequitur naturam.

and when the earth doth shadow the Sun, it is night, much be we people bound to laud God for that noble planet, for he comforteth both man and beast, fish, and all foules that flieth in the ayr, all things is glad of the Sun the red Rose and faire flowers, after that the Sun goeth far into the West they close themselves.

Of his properties.

AL men and women that be born under the Sun shall be very fair, amiable of face, and their skin shalbe right white, tender, and well coloured in the visage with a little rednesse, and they shall have a pleasure in their own beauty, they shall shew their lives as they were good and holy but they shall be secret hy∣pocrites, if they give them to religion they shal be fortunate to great pro∣motions, they shal be clean and good of faith, and shalbe governors of other people, and if they be never so poor, yet shall they love hawking and hunt∣ing with hounds and hawkes, and reioyce to see it, the children that is born under the Sun shall desire honor and science, and shal sing very pleasant∣ly and they shalbe of good courage and diligent, and shall desire Lordship above other people, they shall give wise iudgements, and their words shall sound all sweetly, and he beare any office he shall be liberall, and he shalbe subtile in feats of war, and many shall seek to him for counsell, he shal have profit by women and he shalbe in service with Lords, and by them shall have advantage for his wisedome, his signe shall be in the face, he shalbe of small stature, with crispe haire, and bald on the head, he will sel∣dome be angry, and of all the members in a mans body, the Sun keepeth the heart, as the most mighty planet above all other.

[illustration]

Venus significat hominem album trahentem ad ni∣gredinem pulchri corporis & capillorum, habentem parvam maxillam, pulchros oculos & pulchrum faci∣em, multos capillos habentem ad album confectum rubore, crassum & benevolentem.

NExt after the Sun reigneth the gentle planet Venus, & it is a planet feminine, and shee is lady over all lovers: this planet is moist and cold of nature, and her two signes is Taurus and Libra, and in them she hath all her ioy and pleasance▪ she caus∣eth ioy, and specially among yong folk, for greatly she reigneth on them, and on all men that be iealous, and on women also, for iealousie is but love inordinate, as when a man or woman loveth more fervently than they should, for such would never be from the sight of their lovers: for if they be, they soon suspect them, and fear to be beguiled. There is no man that loveth a woman by carnall affection▪ but it is by the influence of Venus, and few men escape out of her danger. This planet Venus runneth in twelve months over the twelve signes.

Of her properties

WHat man or woman that is born under Venus shall be a gay lover, pleasant, delitious, & most commonly they have black eies, & little browes, red lips and cheeks, with a smiling cheer; they shall love the voyce of trumpets, clarions, with other min∣stralsie: they shal be pleasant singers, with sweet voice, full of wanton toyes, plaies, and scoffings: they shal greatly delight in dancing, in gambols, in leaping and springing, and will use playing at the chesse, and at the cards, and tables, and desire oft to commune of lust and love, and covet of sweet meats and drinks, as wine, and be oft drunken▪ and oft desire lechery, and the beholding of fair women, and the women of men in like wise, and use dead fleshly lusts oftentimes▪ they will desire fair cloaths of gay colour, and fine, with rings of vanity, and all vain pleasure of the world,

with fair and rich clothes, and pearles, pretious stones, they shall love flow∣ers with sweet smels, yet shal they be of good faith, and they shall love other aswel as themselves, they shall be liberall to their friends, they shall have few enemies, if they be brown they shalbe well proportioned of body, if they swear it is true, ye may beleeve them: and Venus governeth the thighs of man.

Of the fair Planet Mercury.

[illustration]

Mercurius significat hominem non multum album ne{que} nigrum habentem colorem, fron∣tem elevatum, longam faciem, & nasum lon∣gum, barbam in maxillis, oculos pulchros non ex toto nigros, longos{que} digitos at{que} perfe∣ctum magistrum.

NExt under Venus is the fair planet Mercury, and it is masculine, next above the moon, and there is no planet lower than Mercury, saving only the moon. This Mercury is very full & dry of nature, and his principall signs be these. Gemini is the first that reigns in the armes and hands of man or woman, and the other signe is Virgo that governeth the navell and stomack of man. This planet is Lord of speech, in like wise as the Sun is Lord of light. This planet Mercury passeth and circueth the xii. signes in CCCxxxviii dayes. Hereafter is shewed the disposition of the children that be born under the planet Mercury, of what condition they shalbe, as Doctors of Astronomy doe discusse.

Of his properties.

WHo is born under Mercury shalbe subtile of wit, and shalbe a de∣vout person to God, and have good conscience, & shalbe very crafty in many sciences, he with his wisedom & labor shal get him many friends and lovers, she hal ever follow & resort to them that be of good ma∣ners, and shalbe fortunate on sea in marchandise, he shalbe very gracious, he shall have harm by women, and when he is married men shall not see so much by him, as before, he will have great love to ladies and gentlewomen,

but yet they shall not be masters over him, he will be a very good man of the Church, or a religious man, and he shal not love to go a warfare, he will hate theeves and swearers, and he shall gather great goods by his wisedome. If he bee a man of the world, he shalbe perfect in some handy craft, he shall love well to preach, and to speak fair rhetorike language, and to talk of philosophie and Geometry, he shall love wel writing, and to read in strange bookes, and to cast accounts of great numbers, and shal be a gay maker of balads, songes, meeters and rimes, he shalbe perfect in the art of musick and love it, he shall love measuring and meting, and he shall be some great clothmaker, he shalbe servant, to some great Lord, or els a receiver of his mony, he shall have a high forehead, a long visage black eies, and a thin beard, he shalbe a great pleader in the law, and he will meddle with other mens deeds if they doe not well, and say against it; and Mercu∣ry governeth the thighes, the flancks and belly.

Of the Moon.

[illustration]

Luna significat hominem album confectum ru∣bore junctis superciliis, benevolum, habentem oculos non ex toto nigros, faciem rotundam, pul∣chram staturam, & in facie ejus signum in initio quod crescet, significat omne quod faciendum est & in plenitudine quod distruendum quia decres∣cit.

IT is to be understood that the lowest planet of the seven is named Lu∣na, which we call the Moon, and is called feminine or female, and is called among the shepheards the Lady of the night, for the chief light and clearnesse that is by night, is by the presence of the Moon, for the Moon is much neerer approached unto us than any star, and therefore she gives us much more light than the stars doe: and also the moon is Lady of moi∣sture, and ruleth the sea by ebb and floud. The moon taketh her light of the Sun 22. times in a year, and also the moon is cold and moist of nature: and her colour is much fairer than silver, and her chief house is Cancer, and there is none of the other planets that is so slow and goeth so little ci••∣cuit as doth the moon, and she descendeth into Scorpio, and she goeth a∣bout the xii signes in 27. dayes, and then changeth, and is called new:

Of her Properties.

SVch men and women as be born under the Moon shall be lowly and serviceable, and very gentle. And if it be a maid child shall be very shamefast and womanly, and they shalbe wel-favored both man and woman, their faces shall be full and round, and they shall be very patient folkes, and will suffer much wrong or they be revenged, & will be soft of speech, and very curteous, and shall live honestly with such as God shall send them, and wil haunt vertuous company, they shall be well formed of body, and have mer∣ry looks, and love honestly to be glad, and will live very chastly, and love greatly the vertue of cleannesse both in word and deed, they hate lecherous talkers and speakers of ribaldry, their colour shal be mixed but with a little rednesse, they shall gladly go attired in many coloured clothes, and they shal sweat in the forehead. Also they will have a great desire to be masters and mistresses over great streames, rivers and flouds, and devise many proper engines to take fish. Look what they say, it shall be true and stedfast, and they shal be very honest, and good goers on foot, and comfort sick persons, they shall love well to talk sometime of marvells, they shall not keep hatred long in their mind, they shall appease the people under colour with their com∣munications, as well as other should doe with silver. Honest women will they love, they will hate harlots and brothels, and shall nourish their children up in vertue and good manners. And the lights and the brains of man is under the governace of Luna.

Thus endeth the seven Planets with their properties.

Of the Physnomy of Shepheards.

PHysnomy of the which been spoken a fore, is a science that shepheards have to know the naturall inclination of man and woman, good or evill, by divers signes on them in beholding them onely. The which incli∣nation we ought to follow if it be good, but if it be evill by vertue & strength of understanding wee ought to eschue and avoide it, and to withstand the said evill inclinations. Shepheards use this science none otherwise. The prudent, vertuous and wise man, may bee of all other as touching their manners, otherwise than their signs shew in their reign. Thus the things demonstred, as to vice is not in a wise man, though the sign be so, as an ale stake, or a sign is sometime hanged before a house▪ in the which oft times is no Ale. Howbeit that a man by his wisedome and understanding follow not the evill influences of the celestiall bodies that be upon him, and yet he corrupteth not the signs and demonstrations of the said influences, but those signes naturally have seignory on them in which they bee, for to have naturally that which they signifie, whether a man have them or not,

wherefore shepheards say that the most part of men & women follow their naturall inclinations to vice or vertue, for that the most part of them be not wise & prudent as they ought to be, and they use no vertue of their own minds, but ensue their sensuality, and by this the celestiall influence of the which is shewed by signes exteriors, and of such signs is the said science of Phisnomy. For the which it behoveth first to know that the time is di∣vided into four parts, as it hath been before said, that is to wit, Prime time, Summer, Harvest, and Winter, that be compared to the four Elements, Prime time to the ayr, Summer to the fire, Harvest to the earth, & Winter to the water. Of the which four Elements every man and woman is for∣med and made, and without the which none may live. The fire is hot and dry. The ayr is hot and moist. The water is moist and cold. The earth is cold and dry. Also some say, the person on whom the fire domineth, is cho∣lerick of complexion, which is to say hot & dry. He on whom the ayr domin∣eth, is sanguine of complexion, which is hot and moist. He on whom the water domineth, is Flegmatick of complexion, which is moist and cold. Hee on whom the earth domineth, is melancholy of complexion, which is cold and dry. The which complexions they know and discern the one from the other by signs which are said here-after.

CHAP. XLI. Of the four complexions.

[illustration]

The Cholerick hath Nature of fire hot and dry, and naturally is lean and

slender, covetous, irefull, hasty, brainlesse, foolish, malicious, deceitfull and subtile, where he applyeth his wit. He hath wine of the Lion, that is to say, when he is drunken he chideth, fighteth, and commonly he loveth to be clad in black, russet and gray.

The sanguine hath nature of ayr, hot and moist, he is large, plenteous, attempered, amiable, abundant in nature, merry, singing, laughing, liking, ruddy, and gracious. He hath his wine of the ape, the more he drinketh the merrier he is, & draweth to women, & naturally loveth high-coloured cloth.

The flegmatick hath nature of water, cold and moist, he is heavy, slow, sleepy, ingenious, commonly he spitteth when he is moved, and hath his wine of the sheep, for when he is drunk he accounteth himself wisest, and he loveth most green colour.

The mellancholy hath nature of earth, cold and dry, he is heavy, covetous, a backbitter, malicious and slow. His wine is of the hog, for when he is drunken he desireth sleep, and he loveth cloth of black colour.

CHAP XLII. The judgment of mans body.

TO come to our purpose of speaking visible signes, we will begin to speak at the signes of the head. First wee advertise that one ought to beware of all persons that hath default of members naturally, as of foot, hand, eye▪ or other member, and though he be but a criple, and specially of a man that hath no beard, for such be inclined to divers vices and evils, and one ought to eschue his company as his mortall enemy. Also shepheards say, that much and plain hair signifieth a person piteous and debonair. They that have red hair be commonly irefull and lack wit, and been of little truth. Black hair, good visage, and good colour, signifieth very love of Iustice. Hard hair signifieth that the person loveth peace and concord, and is of good and subtile wit. A man that hath black hair and a red beard, signifies to be letcherous, disloyall, a vanter, and one ought not to trust in him. The yellow hair and crisp signifieth a man laughing, mercy, letcherous and deceitfull. Black hair and crisp signifieth melancholy, letchery, evill thought, and very large hanging hair, signifieth wit with malice. Great plenty of hair in a woman signifieth boisterousnesse and covetise. A person with great eyes is slothfull, unshamefull, inobedient, and weeneth to know more than hee doth: but when the eies be mean, ne too big ne too small, and that they be not too black nor too green, such a man is of good understanding, curte∣ous, faithfull, and trusty. A person that is blear-eyed, gogled and squint, signifieth malice, vengeance, cantell, and treason. They which have great wide eyes and hath long hair on their browes and eye-lids, signifieth foo∣lishnesse, hard of understanding, and robust wit, and be evill by nature. The persons that have their eyes moving fast from one side unto another, and have their sight sharpe and quick, signifieth fraud and theft, and is of little trust. The eyes that been black, cleare and shining, been the best and the most certain, and signifieth wit and discretion, and such a

person is worthy to be beloved, for he is full of truth, and of good conditi∣ons. The eyes that been ardent and sparkling, signifieth strong heat, force and puisance. The eyes that been whitish and fleshly, signifieth a person in∣clined to vice letchery, and full of fraud. Shepheards say, that when a person beholdeth often as abashed, shamfast, and fearfull, and that in be∣holding it seemeth that he sigheth and he hath small drops appearing in his ties, then it is for certain that such persons loveth, and desireth the wealth of them that they behold. But when any looketh in casting his eyes aside, as by wantonnesse, such persons be deceitfull, and purchaseth to grieve him and such persons will dishonor women, and they ought to be taken heed of, for such looks be false, letcherous and deceivable. They that have small greyish eyes and sharp, signifieth a person melancholous, hardy, an evill speaker and cruell. And if a little vein appear between the eyes and the nose of a wench, they say it signifieth virginity, and in a man subtilty of un∣derstanding, and if it appear great and black, it signifies corruption, heat and melancholy in women, and in man rudenesse and default of wit, but that vein appeareth not always. But the eies been yellow, and have no hair on the browes, signifieth meselry and evill disposition of body. Great haires and long, signifieth rudenesse, hard engine, and letchery. The beet∣led browes signifieth malice, cruelty, letchery, and envie. And when the browes been thin, it signifieth subtile, engine, wit▪ and faithfullnesse. Hol∣low eyes and hanging browes, signifieth a person full of evill saying, of evill thought, a great drinker, and comonly applieth his mind to malice. A little short visage and a small neck, a little slender nose, signifieth a per∣son of great heart, hasty and irefull A long nose and high by nature signi∣fieth prowesse and hardesse. A short raised nose signifieth hastinesse letchery hardinesse, and an undertaker; a hooked nose that boweth to the upper lip, signifieth malice, deceit, untruth, and letchery. A great nose and high in the midst, signifieth a wise man and well spoken A great nose with wide nost∣rils, signifieth gluttony and ire. A red face and short, signifieth a person full of riot, debate and disloyal. A visage, neither too short nor too long, and that is not overfat, with good colour, betokeneth a man veritable amiable, wise, witty, serviceable, debonair, and well ordered in all his works. A fat visage and full of red flesh signifieth gluttony, negligence, rudenesse of wit, and understanding. A slender face and some-what long, signifieth a person well advised in all his workes by good measure. A little short visage of yel∣low colour signifieth a person deceiving, untrue, malitious, and full of harm. A visage long and fair, signifieth a man hot, disloyall, spitefull, and full of ire and cruelty, They that have their mouth great and wide, signifieth ire and hardnesse. A little mouth, signifieth melancholly, heavinesse, hard wit, and evill thought. He that hath great lippes, hath a token of rudenesse and default of wit. Thin Lippes, signifieth liquerousnesse and leasing. Teeth even set and thin, betokeneth a true lover, letcherous, and

of good complexion. Long teeth and great, signifying hastinesse and yre, Long eares signifieth folly, but it is a sign of good memory. Little eares signifieth letchery and theft A person that hath a good voice, well sounding; is hardy, wise and well spoken. A mean voice that is not small ne too great signifieth wit, purveiance, truth, and right wittinesse. A man that speak∣eth hastily is of value. A great voice in a woman is an evill sign. A soft voice signifieth a person full of envie, of suspicion and leasings. An over-small voice, signifieth great heart and folly. Great voice signifieth hastynesse and ire. A man that stirreth alway when he speaketh, and changeth voyce, is envious, nice, drunk, lewd, and evill conditioned. A person that speaketh temperatly without moving, is of perfect understanding, of good condition, and of good counsell. A man with a round visage, running eyes, and yellow teeth, is of little truth, a traitor, and hath a stinking breath. A person with a long slender neck, is cruell, without pity, hasty, and brainlesse. A person with a short neck, is full of fraude, barate of deception, of malice, and none ought to trust in him. A person that hath a long thick neck, signi∣fyeth gluttony, force, and great letchery. A manly woman that is great & truely membred, is by nature melancholyous, valiant and letcherous. One that hath a great long belly, signifieth small wit, pride, and letchery. A little bellie and large feet, signifieth good understanding, good counsell, and true. A person having large feet, high and curbed shoulders, signifieth prowesse, hardinesse, hastinesse, truth and wit. Shoulders sharp and long, betokeneth letchery, untruth, barate and unnaturall. When the armes been so long that they may stretch to the ioynt of the knee, it is a token of prowes, largesse, truth, honor, good wit, and understanding: when the armes be short, it is a sign of ignorance, of evill nature, and a person that loveth de∣bate. Long hands and slender fingers signifieth subtilty, and a person that hath desire to know many things. Small hands and short thicke fingers betokeneth folly and lightnesse of courage. Thick and large hands, and big, signifieth force, hastinesse, hardinesse, and wit. Clear and shining nailes of good colour signifieth wit, and increase of honor. Nayles full of white spots and riveled▪ signifieth a person avaricious, letcherous, proud, and of great heart, full of wit and malice. The foot thick and full of flesh, signifieth a person outragious, vigorous, and of little wit. Small feet and light, signifieth hardnesse of understanding, and little truth. Feet flat and short, signifieth an anguishous person, of small wisedom and un∣curtesie. A person that goeth a great pace is great of heart, and despitefull. A person that maketh small steppes and thick, is suspicious, full of envy, and evill will. A person that hath a small flat foot, and casteth as a child, sig∣nifieth hardinesse and wit, but the said person hath divers thoughts. A person that hath soft flesh, too cold ne too hot, signifieth a well disposed per∣son, of good understanding and subtile wit, full of truth, and increasing of honor. A person that laugheth gladly, and hath green eyes, is

debonair of good wit, true, wise, and letcherous. The person that laugheth faintly, is slothfull, mellancholious, suspicious, malicious and subtile.

Shepheards say, for that there are divers signes in a man and woman, and that they be sometime contrary one to the other, one ought to iudge for the most part after the signes in the visage. First of the eyes, for they be tru∣est, they say also God formed no creature to inhabit the world wiser then man, for there is no condition in a beast but is comprehended in man. Na∣turally a man is hardy as the Lyon, true and worthy as the Ox, large and liberall as the Cock, avaricious as the Dog, and aspre as the Hart, debonair and true as the Turtle, malicious as the Leopard, prevy and tame as the Dove, dolorous & guilefull as the Fox, simple and debonaire as the Lambe, shrewd as the Ape, light as the Horse, soft and pitifull as the Bear, dear and precious as the Eliphant, good and wholsome as the Vnicorn, vile &

[illustration]

slothfull as the Asse, fair and proud as the Peacock, gluttenous as the Wolf, envious as the Bitch, inobedient as the Nightingale, humble as the Pi∣geon, fel & foolish as the Ostrich, pro∣fitable as the Pismire, dissolute and vagabond as the Goat, spitefull as the Fesant, soft and meek as the Chicken, moveable and varying as the Fish, letcherous as the Bore, strong and puissant as the Camell, traitor as the Mule, advised as the Mouse, reasonable as an Angel: & therfore he is called the little world, for he participateth of all, or he is cal∣led all creatures: for as it is said, he participateth and hath condition of all creatures.

CHAP. XLIII Shepheards practise that quadrant of the night, as yee may see by this figure.

BY this figure one may know the hours by night as followeth, let the Star be known we call the pomel of the sky, right under is the summer, at the hour of mid-night, & the place on the earth against the star that we call the Angel of the earth. When we wil see it at eie we behold

our Pomel, and I behold under this cord and the nether end of my cord is the angle of the earth, and the Sun is right under it. The long line that tra∣verseth the star of the figure, that is the pomel of the skies, serveth for two hours, and the small lines for one hour. But yet serve lines as the chang∣ing of the star that signifieth mid-night, & consequently the other hours for the long hours serve to a month, and the small to fifteen days. Let the cord be stretched, that it be seen over the pomel, note some star un∣der the cord, that may be alway known, and that shall be it that alway shall shew us the hours of the night. After imagine a circle about the pomel, and distance of the star marked, in which circle be imagined the lines or semblable distances, as in the figure. As many distances as the marked star shall be before the cord, so many hours shall there be before midnight, and as many as shalbe behind the cord, so many hours be after midnight. It must be known that the star marked changed the place in xv. days, by the distinction of an hour, in a month of two. Wherfore it behoveth to take midnight in xv▪ days further by the distance of an hour, and in a month

[illustration]

of two, and in two months of four, and in three months of six, so as in six months the star marked that was right under the pomell shall be right over, and in other six months it will come to the point where as it was first marked, and this said marked star one ought not to change, but ought to choose it among many for the most knowledgable, and for the most to be found among other.

By this present figure, shepheards know by night in the fields all seasons, what time and hour it is, be it before midnight or after.

The xxiv. letters without the figure, be for the xxiv. hours of a naturall day, and the xii. within been for the xii. months. The star in the middest is the pomel of the skies, with the which it behoveth to know one that is next it, which shall be a marked star, and it by the which one may know

[illustration]

the hour in the manner as afore is said, in taking mid-night in fifteen days, further more by the distance of an hour.

FOr to know by night the place a∣gainst mid-day as of midnight, the high Orient, and the high Occi∣dent, the low Orient, & the low Occi∣dent, and the place in the sky, over against which every signe riseth. Shepheards useth this practice. They hang a cord that is made sted∣fast above and beneath▪ then another with a plomb, that descendeth till it be time for to stay it that they may be a little distance one from another, so that one may see the star of the pomel right under the two cordes at once, then they stay the cord with the plomb above, or beneath. Now who that will see mid-day directly be it night or day, goe on the other side the cords, and thou shalt see the place against midday. Then come on the first side, & thou shalt see the place against midnight though it be day. For the highest point of the Zo∣diak in the longest day of Summer let the Sun be seen under the two cords at the hour of midday, and that

he be so near that he touch the cords, and marke in the cord toward the Sun, the height that he hath seen it, then by night mark some stars that one may alway know on, in the same place is the passage of the solstice of Summer. And when the days be at the shortest, the star which we see at midnight in the said point of mid-day, been directly they that be next to the solstice of Summer, that which hath the sign next toward orient is Cancer, and the sign next toward Occident is Gemini. And it is said from the height of the solstice of Summer, one may practice the low solstice of Winter, the which we see on the mid-day, when the day is at the shortest over the place against midnight, and his next sign toward Orient is Capricorn, and that toward Occident is Sagittarius. One may mark the high Orient or the low, but it behoveth that it be when the days be at the longest or shortest & the distance between the two Orients divided into six equall parts, by each riseth two signes, by the nearest part of the high Orient, riseth Gemini and Cancer, by the second Taurus and Leo, by the third Aries and Virgo, by the fourth Pisces and Libra, by the fift Aquarius and Scorpio, by the sixt more near the Occident Capricornus and Sagittarius, and divers other things which may be practiced on the sky.

CHAP. XLIV. Of divers impressions that Shepheards see in the night in the ayr.

SHepheards that lieth by night in the fields, seeth many & divers impres∣sions in the ayr, and on the earth, which they which lyeth in their beds see not. Sometime they have seen in the ayr a manner of Commet, in form and fashion of a Dragon, casting fire by the throat. Another time they have seen fire leaping in manner of Goats, that leapeth without long during. And other times a white impression, the which appeareth always by night and at all hours, which they call the high-way to St. Iames in Calice.

The flying Dragon, Goats of the fire leaping, the high-way to St. James in Calice.

[illustration]

Other impressions there be, as flames of fire that mounteth. Other as flaming of fire that goeth side-way. Other as still fire that bideth long. O∣ther there is that maketh great flames and bideth not long. Others also as candles, sometime great and sometime little, and this they see in the ayr and on the earth. Another Comet they see falling as an ardent spear.

Burning candle, Spear ardent, fire mounting, burning sparkles, fire-brands, wild fire.

[illustration]

Moreover Shepheards see comets in other manners, that is to weet, in manner of a pillar flaming, and dureth long. Another in manner of a flying star that passeth lightly. But the third is a covered star that dureth longest of all. They see other five stars erraticks that goeth not as the other, and been they which they call planets, but they have form of the planets, and been Saturn, Iupiter, Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and they see stars of the which one is called the bearded star, and the other the haired star, and the other atayled star.

Stars erraticks, Comet tailed, flying star, Pillar ardent, star tayled, Star haired, Star bearded.

[illustration]

Quatuor his casibus sine dubio cadit adulter, Aut hic pauper erit, aut subito morietur, Aut cadit in causam qua debet judice vinci. Aut aliquod membrum casu, vel crimine perdet.

Of a thunderstone that fell in the Dutchie of Austrich.

Howbeit that the impressions before seem things marvellous to people that have not seen them, they say that it is in part impossible, Know they and other, that in the year of our Lord Mxcii. the vii. day of November, a wonder hapned in the Earldom of Ferrare in the Dutchy of Austrich, near a towne named Euszheim, where that day was great thunder and orage. In the plain fields nigh the said town fel a stone of thunder, which weigh∣ed two hundred and fifty pound and more. Which stone to this prsent time is kept in the said town, and every man and woman may see it that will. Of which stone followeth an Epitaph.

Here followeth the Epitaph of the Thunder-stone.

VIr legat antiquis miracula facta sub annis, Qui volet, & nostros comparet inde dies, Visa licet fuerint portenta, horrendaque monstra, Lucere coelo, flamma, corona, trabes, Aster diurna, faces, temo, & telluris hiatus, Et bolides, typhon, sanguineusque polus, Circulus, & lumen nocturno tempore visum, Ardentes clipei, & nubigenaeque ferae Montibus & visi quondam concurrere montes, Armorum & crepitus, & tuba terribillis, Lac pluere coelo visum est, frugesque calybsque Ferrum etiam, & lateres, & caro, lana, cruor, Et sexcenta aliis ostensa à scripta libellis, Prodigiis ausim vix simulare novis, Visio dira quidem Frederici tempore primi, Et tremor in terris, lunaque, solque triplex, Hinc cruce signatus Frederico rege secundo, Exidit in scriptis grammate ab imbre lapis, Austria quem genuit senior Fredericus, in agros Tertius hunc proprios, & cadere arva videt, Nempe quadragintos proh mille peregerat annos, Sol noviesque decem signiferatque duos,

[illustration]

Septem praeterea dat idus metuenda Novembris, Ad medium cursum tenderat illa dies, Cum tonat horridum crepuitque per aera fulmen Multisonum, hic ingens concidit atque lapis Cui species delite est aciesque triangula, obustus Est color & terrae forma metalligerae, Missus ab obliquo fertur, visusque sub auris Saturni qualem mittere sydus habet. Senserat hunc Enszheim sunt gaudia sensit in agros Illic insiluit depopulatus humum, Qui licet in partes fuerat distractus ubique, Pondus adhuc tamen hoc continet ecce vides, Qui mirum est potuisse hyemis cecidisse diebus, Aut fieri in tanto frigore congeries, Et nisi anaragore referant monimenta, molarem Casurum lapidem credere & ista negem, Hic tamen auditus fragor undique littore Rheni Audiit hunc uti proximus alpicola.

CHAP. XLV. How the year goeth about by xii. months, and how a man waxeth in xii. ages of his life.

WE should beleeve that it is certain true, that the xii months and seasons changeth xii. times the man, even as the xii. months changeth them in the year twelve times, as every one after o∣ther by the course of nature, and so mans life changes every six year, and so after that forth to twelve ages, & every age lasteth six year, and so twelve times six makes lxxii. and so long every man may preserve his body without sicknesse, if they keep themselves well in youth, by good diet and good governance, for ye know wel that many men slay themselves, and die long ere they should do, as by surfets, over salt meats, over-cold meats, or too hot in operation, contrary to their complexion, or by taking great heat, and after great cold, or by evill aires, or by taking of thought, or by great wet, going in the rain, or going wet-shod, or over-much using the company of women, or by fighting in his youth & losing some of his blood, or by great anger, or by fals or burdens, or by too great study over-reaching his mind. These with many other, men may alter their complexion, and shorten their lives, and all for lack of good governing in their youth. And they that live till lxxii. is by their good living and diet. Then may they live in decrepit till lxxx. or an hundred yeers, but few passeth that. All is Gods ordinance, to lengthen and shorten their days at his pleasure.

[illustration]

CHAP. XLVI. Of the commodities of the twelve months in the year, with the twelve ages of man.

January.

The first month is January, the child is without might untill he be six years old, he cannot help himself.

February.

The first year that is the first time of the springing of all flowers, and so the child til xii. year groweth in knowledge and learning, and to doe as he is taught.

March.

March is the budding time, and in that six years of March the childe waxeth big and apt to do service, and learn science from twelve to sixteen, such as is shewed him.

Aprill.

Aprill is the springing time of flowers, and in that six years he groweth to mans state in hight and bredth, and waxeth wise and bold, but then be∣ware of sensuality, for he is xxiv.

Maie.

Maie is the season that flowres been spread, and be then in their vertue, with sweet odors. In these six years he is in his most strength, but then let him gather good manners betime, for if he tarry past that age, it is hap if ever he take them, for then he is xxx. years.

June.

In Iune he begins to close his mind, then waxeth he ripe, for then he is xxxvi. years.

July.

In Iuly he is xlii. and begins a little to decline, and feeleth him not so prosperous as he was.

August.

In August he is xlviii. and then he goeth not so lustily as he did, but stu∣dies how to gather to find him in his old age, to live more easily.

September.

In September he is liv. year, he then purveyeth against winter, to che∣rish himself withall, and keep neer together the goods he got in his youth.

October.

Then is a man lx. years full, if he hath ought, he gladdeth, and if he hath nought, he weepeth.

November.

Then is man lxvi. he stoopeth and goeth softly, and loseth all his beauty and fairnesse.

December.

In December is man lxxii. years, then had he rather have a warm fire than a fair Lady, and after this age he groweth decrepit to wax a child again, and cannot weld himself, and then yong folk be weary of his com∣pany, but if they have much goods, they been full evill taken heed of.

CHAP. XLVII. Of an assault against a Snaile.

The woman speaketh with an hardy courage.

GO out of this place thou ugly beast, Which of the Vines the burgenings doth eat, And buds of trees both more and least, In dewy mornings gainst the weat. Out of this place, least I thee sore beat With my distaffe between thy hornes twaine, That it shall sound into the realme of Spaine.

The men of armes with their fierce countenance.

Horrible Snaile, lightly thy hornes down lay, And from this place, out fast look that thou rin, Or with sharp weapons we will thee fray. And take the castle that thou lyest in. We shall flay thee out of thy foule skin And in a dish with Onions and Pepper, We will thee dresse, and with strong Vineger.

There was never yet any Lumbard, That did thee eat in such manner of wise, And break we shall thy house strong and hard, Wherefore get thee hence by our advice. Out of this place of this rich edifice, Wee thee require if it be thy will, And let us have this towre that we come till.

The Snaile speaketh.

I am a beast of right great marvaile, Vpon my back, my house raised I bear, I am neither flesh ne bone to availe, As well as an Oxe two hornes I wear. If that these armed men approach me near I shall them soon vanquish every chone, But they dare not, for feare of me alone.

[illustration]

CHAP. XLVIII. Here followeth the meditations of the passion of our Lord Jesus Christ, that Shepheardes and simple people ought to have in hearing the divine service.

IT behoveth for to think afore the beginning of Matins on the words that Iesus said in the garden, the night afore that he took his blessed passion, Father if it be possible transport from me this chalyce. How be it my will be not don, but thine, and that in so saying, he suffered so great payn, that he sweat droppes of bloud, in such abundance, that it ran down to the ground.

And at Matins time it behoveth to think how as the traytour Judas ap∣proched him to our Lord, and kissing him sayd, Ave rabbi. I salute thee Ma∣ster. And that the meek and benign Iesus withdrew not his visage from the traitour, and how hee suffered himself to be taken and bounden as a theef, and cast to the earth, reviled, spitten on, and left of his disciples and servants. At Landes, it behoveth to think and consider, Iesus being in the house of Annas, and after in the house of Caiphas dispyteously beaten, blasphemed, stretched, and bespitten in his most precious visage, his eies bounden, and after troden under foot inhumanely.

At Prime it behoveth to think how as Iesus was led from the house of Caiphas to Pilate, and the beatings that he had. And how Pilate exami∣ned him of that they had wrongfully accused him of, and how he was cru∣elly beaten at a piller before a great multitude of people, and crowned with thornes.

At Tierce it behoveth to think how Iesus was presented before the peo∣ple with a crown of thornes, clothed with a mantle of purple, and the cur∣sed people cryed Crucifige, Crucifige eum. And how Pilate condemned him to the most bitterfull death, and how he bare the heavy cross upon his sacred shoulders.

At noon it behoveth to think how Iesus was lead to the mount of Cal∣vary, shedding his precious blood, and how he fell divers times under his Crosse. And how he was nailed with great blunt nailes, and the dolour that he suffered when it was let fall into the morteis. And think also of the dolours of his sorrowfull mother.

At high noon it behoveth to think what dolour he was in when he said, my God, my God, wherefore hast thou left me. And when he said, I thirst, they gave him vineger and gall mingled, and how he abode the death, after sighes made, he gave up the ghost to God his father. And how his mother had great sorrow also.

At Evensong it behoveth to think how Iesus had his side opened with a speare, and how he hung dead on the Crosse full of wounds from the top

of his head to the soles of his feet, and he taken down, and how his mother layed him on her lappe weeping.

At Complyne think how Iesus was wounded and layed in sepulture, and kept of the Iewes to the end that he should not rise.

Clarkes and lay people ought to think on these, or they go to Matins.

CHAP. XLIX. The saying of a dead man.

[illustration]

Man look and see, Take heed of me, How thou shalt be When thou art dead, Dry as a tree, Worms shall eat thee, Thy great beautie Shal be like lead.

The time hath been, In my youth green, That I was clean Of body as ye are, But for mine eyne Now two holes been, Of me is seen But bones all bare.

Now intend, For to amend.

O Mortall creatures, sayling in the waves of mysery, Avail the sail of your conscience unpure, Flee from the perills of this unstedfast wherry. Drive to the haven of charity most sure, And cast the anker of true confession, Fastened with the great cable of contrition clean, Wind up the marchandise of whole satisfaction. Which of true customers shal be over seen, And brought to the warehouse of perfection, As perfect marchants, of God by election.

CHAP. L. How every man and woman ought to cease of their sins at the sounding of a dreadfull horn.

[illustration]

HO, ho, you blind folk darkned in the cloud Of ignorant fumes, thick and mystical, Take heed of my horn, toting all aloud. With boystrous sounds, and blastes Boreal, Giving you warning of the iudgment finall, The which dayly is ready, to give sentence On perverse people, replete with negligence.

Ho, ho betime, or that it be too late, Cease while ye have space, and portunate. Leave your follies, or death make you chekmate. Cease your ignorant incredulitie, Clense your thoughts of immundicity. Cease of your pecuniall pensement, The which defieth your entendement.

Ho, ho people, infect with negligence, Cease your sins, that manyfold cruelties. Dread God your maker, and rightwise sentence. Cease your blindnesse, of worldly vanities, Lest he you smite with endlesse infirmities, Cease your covetise, gluttony, and pride, And cease your superfluous garments wide.

Cease of your oathes, cease of your great swearing, Cease of your pomp, cease of your vain glory. Cease of your hate, cease of your blaspheming, Cease of your malice, cease of envy, Cease of your wrath, cease of your letchery. Cease of your fraud, cease of your deception, Cease of your tongues, making detraction.

Flee faint falshood, fickle, fuol and fell, Flee fatall flatterers, full of fairnesse, Flee fair feigning fables of favell. Flee folkes fellowship frequenting falsenesse. Flee frantick facers, fulfilled of frowardnesse, Flee fooles fallacies, flee fond fantasies, Flee from fresh fables, feigning flatteries.

[illustration]

Thus endeth the horner.

CHAP. LI. To know the fortunes and destinies of man born under the xii. signes, after Ptolomeus prince of Astronomy.

[illustration]

Prince of Astronomy Ptolomeus.

TO know under what planet a man or a woman is born, it is needfull to wit that there is seven planets on the sky, that is to say, Sol Ve∣nus, Mars▪ Mercurius, Iupiter, Luna, and Saturnus. Of the seven pla∣nets, is named the seven days of the week, for every day hath his name of

the planet reigning in the beginning of it. The ancient Philosophers saith that Sol domineth the Sunday, the cause is (they say for the Sun among other planets is most worthy, wherefore it taketh the worthyest day, that is Sunday. Luna domineth the first hour of Munday. Mars the first hour of Tuesday. Mercurius of Wensday. Iupiter for Thursday. Ve∣nus for Friday, and Saturnus for Saturday. The day naturall hath xxiv. hours, and every hour reigneth a planet.

It is to be noted, that when a man will begin to reckon at Sunday, he must reckon thus, Sol, Venus, Mercurius, Luna, Saturnus, Iupiter, Mars.

And when the number is failed, he must begin at the hour that he would know what planet reigneth. The Munday he ought to begin at Luna, the Tuesday at Mars, the Wensday at Mercury, the Thursday at Iupiter, the Fryday at Venus, the Saturday at Saturnus. And ever when the num∣bers of the planets is failed, he must begin by order as it is afore-said.

Also it is to be noted, that the Greeks beginneth their day in the morn∣ing. The Iewes at noon. And the Christian-men at mid-night, and there we ought to begin to reckon. For at one of the clock on Sunday in the morning reigneth Sol, at two reigneth Venus, at three reigneth Mercu∣rius, at four reigneth Luna, at five Saturnus, at six Iupiter, at seven Mars, at eight begin againe at Sol, at nine, at Venus, at ten Mercury, and consequently of the other by order in order in every hour.

When a child is born, it is to be known at what hour, and if it be in the begining of the hour, in the middest, at the end. If it be in the begin∣ing, he shall hold of the same planet and of the other before. If it be in the middest, it shall hold of that only. If it be born in the end, it shall hold of the same, and of that that commeth next after, but neverthelesse the planet that it is born under, ne shall not domineth other, and that of the day shal be above it, which is the cause that a child holdeth of divers planets, and hath divers conditions. He that is born under Sol shalbe prudent and wise, a great speaker, and that which he praiseth hee holdeth vertuous in himself. Who that is born under Venus is loved of every man, good to God-ward and regular. Who that is born under Mercurie is well bearded, subtile, milde, veritable, and is not most prudent. Who that is born under Luna, hath an high forehead, ruddy, merry visage, shamefast, and religious. Who that is born under Saturn is hardy, curteous of living, & is not avaricious. Who that is born under Iupiter is hardy, fair visage and ruddy, chast and vagabond.

Who that is born under Mars is a great speaker, a lyer, a theef, a de∣ceiver, big, and ofred colour.

They that will know of this more evidently, let them turn to the proper∣ties of the seven Planets afore rehearsed.

CHAP. LII. A prologue of the Author upon the twelve signes.

[illustration]

I Considering the course of the Celestiall bodies and the puissance of the high God Omnipotent, the which hath made the Sun to shine upon the good and evill that governeth all things contained in the firmament, and on the earth, have taken on me to indite this little treatise, for to in∣struct and endoctrin the people not lettered. First, to know God their maker. Secondly to govern their bodies, and eschue infirmities. And thirdly, to know the course of the firmament, and of the celestiall bodies

conteined in it, with the disposition of the vii. Planets But who that will know his properties, ought first to know the Month that he was born in, and the sign that the Sun was in the same day, I will not say that such things shalbe, but that the signs have such properties, and is the will of God. After Poets and Astronomers Aries is the first sign, that sheweth the fortunes of men and women, as saith Ptolomeus.

The first sign of Aries.

[illustration]

I Find that he which is born in the sign of Aries, from mid March to mid Aprill, shal be of good wit, and shall neither be rich ne poor, he shall have dama•••• by his neighbours, he shall have power over dea•• ••••lkes goods, he shall be soon angry, and soon appeased, he shall have divers fortunes & discords, he will desire doctrine, and haunt eloquent people, and shall be expert in many degrees, he shalbe a lyer, and unstedfast of courage, and will take the venge∣ance on his enemies, and he shalbe better disposed in youth in all things, than in age, unto xxxiii. year he shall be a fornicatour, and shalbe wedded at xxv. year, and if he be not, he shall not bee chast▪ he shall be a mediatour for some of his friendes, and will gladly be busie in the needs of other, he shalbe awaited to be damaged, he shall have a sign in the shoulder, in his head, and in his body, yet he shall be rich by the deathes of other: his first son shall not live long, he shalbe in danger of four footed beastes, hee shall have great sickenesse at xxiii. year, and if he escape, he shall live lxxxv. year after Nature.

The woman that is born in this time shalbe irefull, and suffer great wrongs from day to day, she will gladly make leasings, and shall leese her husband and recover a better, shee shall be sick at five year of age, and at xxv. she shalbe in great danger of death, and if she escape she shalbe in doubt till xliii. year, and shall suffer great pain of the head. The days of Sol and Mars to them shalbe right good, and the days of ••upiter shalbe contrary to them, and aswell the men as the women shalbe semblable to the Sheep, that every year leeseth his fleece of wool, and within short space recovereth it again.

Of the sign of Taurus.

[illustration]

HE that is born in the Sign of Taurus, from mid Aprill till mid May, shalbe strong, hardy, and full of strife, delicious, and shall possesse goods given to him by other men: that he would have done shalbe incontinent, and will enforce to himself to finish it. In his youth he will dispise every person, shall be irefull, he shall goe pilgri∣mages

and will leave his friends and live among strangers, he shall be put in offices, & shall exercise them well, and shall be rich by women, he shall be thanklesse, and come to good estate, he will take vengeance on his ene∣mies, he shalbe bitten of a dogge, and shall experiment many pains by women, and shall be in perill at xxxiii. year, he shall be in perill of water, and shalbe greeved by sicknesse, and venym at xxiii. year, and at xxx. year he shalbe abundant in riches, and shall rise ••o great dignity, and shall live lxxxv. year, and three monthes after nature, and shall see his fortune sor∣rowfull. The woman that is born in this time shall be effectuall, labor∣ing, and a great lyer, and shall suffer much shame, she shall re••oyce in the goods of her friendes, that which she co••••••••veth in her mind shall come to effect, and shall have the best party▪ she shall ••••ve many husbands and many children, she shall be in her best estate a•• xvi. years, and she shall have a sign in the middest of her body, she shall be sickely, and if she escape she shall live lxxvi. years after nature. She ought to bear rings and precious stones upon her. The daies of Jupiter and of Luna been right good for them, and the dayes of Mars contrary. As well the man as the woman, may be likened to the bull that laboreth the land, and when the seed is sowen, he hath but the straw for his part. They shall keep well their own, and it shall not profit to them ne to other, and shall be reputed unkind.

Of the sign of Gemini.

[illustration]

THE man that is born in the sign of Gemini from mid Maie to mid Iune, shall have many woundes, and he shalbe fain and mercyfull, he shall lead an open and a reasonable life, he shall receive much money, he will goe in unknown places, and do many pilgrimages, he will praise himself, and will not bide in the place of his nativitie, he shall be wise and negligent in his workes, he shall come to riches unto xxvi. year, his first wife shall not live long, but he shall marry strange women, he shalbe late married, he shall be bitten of a dog, and shall have a marke of Iron or of fire, he shalbe tor∣mented in water, and shall passe the sea, and shall live an hundred year, and x. monthes after nature. The woman then born shall come to honor, and set forward with the goods of other, and she shalbe agrieved of a false crime, she ought to be wedded at xiv. year if she shall be chaste and eshewe all perill, and shall live lxx. year after nature, and shall honor God. The days of Mercury and Sol to them been right good, the days of Luna and Ve∣nus been to them contrary, and as wel the man as the woman shall aug∣ment and assemble the goods of their successors, but skantly shall they use their owne goods, they shall be so avaricious.

Of the sign of Cancer.

[illustration]

NExt after, he that is born under the sign of Cancer, from mid Iune to mid Iuly, shalbe very avaricious, and of equal stature, he will love women, he shalbe merry, humble, good, wise, and well re∣nowned, he shall have domage by envy, he shall have the money of other in his guiding, he shall be a con∣ductor of other folkes things, he shall have strife and discord among his neighbors, and will avenge him on his enemy, by his arrogance ma•• shall mock him, he shall have often great fear on the water, he wil keep his courage secretly in himself, and shal suffer dolour of the womb, he shall find hidden money, and labor sore for his wife, he shall see his peril in a certain year, the which shalbe known of God, his favour shall decrease, at xxxiii. year he shall passe the sea, and shall live lxx. year after nature, and fortune shall be agreeable to him.

The woman that shalbe born in this time shalbe furious, incontinent, angry and soon appeased, she is nimble, serviceable, wise, ioyous, and shall suffer many perilles; if any person do her any service, she will recompence them wel, she shall be labouring and take great pain unto xxx. year, and then she shall have rest, she shall have many sons, she must be wedded at xiv. year: honours and gifts shall follow her, she shal have wounds and be whole thereof, and shal have perill of waters, and shalbe hurt in a secret place, she shall be bitten of a dog, and shal live lxx. year after nature. The days of Jupiter, Venus and Luna, to them been right good, and the days of Mars right evill, and aswell the man as the woman shal have good fortunes and victory over their enemies.

Of the sign of Leo.

[illustration]

AS wee read he that is born under the sign of Leo, from mid Iuly to mid August, shal be fain and hardy, he shall speak openly and shall be mercifull, he shall weep with the weepers, and shalbe arrogant in words, he shall have a perill in certain time, and at xxx. year he shalbe awaited to be damaged, but he shall eschue that perril, his benefites shall be in great, he shall be honoured of good folk, and obtain his enterprise, he shall have goods by temporal ser∣vices, he shall be ingrate to theeves, and shalbe great and puissant, he shall have charge of the commonalty, and as much as he leeseth he shall

win, hee shall come to dignity and shall ••e amiable, he shall take fortune of three wives, hee will goe often on pilgrimages and suffer pain o•• the sight, hee shall fall from high, and be fearful of water, he shall find hid money, at viii. year of age he shall be sick, also he shalbe in perill and doubt of some great Lord, and at xxxvi. year he shalbe bitten of a dog, and be whole with great pain, and shall live lxxxiv. year after nature.

The woman that shalbe born in this time shall be a great lyer, fair, well spoken, mercifull, pleasant, and may not suffer, ne see men weep, she shall be meek, her first husband shall not live long, she shall have pain in her sto∣make she shalbe awaited of her neighbours, at xvii. year, and live to great riches, she shall have children of three men, she shall be amiable, and have the blouddy flixe, and shall be bitten of a dogge, she shall fall from high, and live lxxvii. year after nature. The days of Mercury, Sol, and Mars, to them be right good, the daies of Saturn been contrary, and as wel the man as the woman shalbe hardy, great quarrellers, and mercifull.

Of the sign of Virgo.

[illustration]

OF the sign of Virgo, I find that hee which is born from mid August to mid September shall, gladly commend his wife, he shalbe a great house-houlder, in∣genious: he shalbe solycitous to his work he shall be shamefaced & of great courage, and all that he seeth he shall covet, in his understanding, he will be soon angry, and surmount his enemies. Scarcely shall he be a while with his first wife, he shalbe fortunate at xxxi. year, he will not hide that that he hath, and shalbe in perill of water, he shal have a wound with iron, and shall live lxx. year after nature.

The woman then born shall be shamefaced, ingenious, & will take pain, and ought to be wed at xxii. year, she shall not be long with her first husband. Her second husband shall be of long life, and shall have much good by ano∣ther woman, she shall fall from high, her life shall be in perill and shal die shortly, she shall suffer dolour at x. year, if she escape those dolours, she shall live lxx. year after nature, she shall bring forth vertuous fruit, and every thing shall favour her, she shall reioyce in divers fortunes. The daies of Mercury and of Sol, shal be right good for them, and the daies of Mars shall be contrary. And as well the man as woman shall suffer many temptations, so that with great pain they many resist them, they shall de∣light to live in chastitie, but they shall suffer much, wheresoever it be.

Of the sign of Libra.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

[illustration]

AMong planets Libra ought to be re∣membred, for he that is born from mid September to mid October, shal be right mightily praised and honored in the service of Captains, he shall g••e in unknown places, and shall get in strange lands▪ he shall keep well his own, if he make not relevation by drink, he will not keep his promise, he shall be envied by silver and other goods, he shal be married, and goe from his wife, he shall speak quickly and shall have no domage among his neighbours, he shall have under his might the goods of dead folk, and shall have some sign in his members. Oxen, horse, and other beasts shal be given to him, he shall have domage and iniury, he shall be enriched by women, and experyment evill fortunes, many shall aske coun∣saile of him. He shall live lxx. year after nature.

The woman that is born in this time shall be amyable and of great cou∣rage, she will anounce the death of her enemyes, and shall go in places un∣known, she shall be debonair and merry, reioyce by her husband, if she be not wedded at xiii. years he shall not be chast, and shall have no sons by her first husband, she shall goe many pilgrimages, after xxx year she shall prosper better and have great honour and praise, then after she shall be greevously sick, and shall be brent in the feet about xii. year of age, and shall live lx. year after nature. The days of Venus & of Luna for them been right good, and the days of Mercury contrary. And aswel the man as the woman shall be in doubt unto the death, and there is doubt in the end.

Of the sign of Scorpio.

[illustration]

WEe read that he which is born in the sign of Scorpius from mid October to mid November shall have good fortune, he shall be a great fornicatour, the first wife that hee shall have in marriage shall be∣come too religious, he will serve gladly to Images▪ he shall suffer pain in his privy members at the age of xv. year, he shall be hardy as a Lyon, and amiable of forme, many faculties shall be given to him, hee shall be a great goer in visiting divers countries, for to know the customes and statutes of many Cities, and shall have victory over all his enemys, they may not hinder him in no manner of wise, hee shall have money by his wife, and shall suffer divers dolours of the stomake, he shall be merry and love the com∣pany of merry folk. In his right shoulder shal be a sign by sweet words & adulations, he shall be deceived, he will often say one thing and doe ano∣ther, he shall have a wound with iron, he shall be bitten of a dog or of some

other beast, he shall be in doubt and have divers enemies at the age of xxxiii. year, and if he escape he shall live lxxxiv. year after nature.

The woman that shall be born in this time shall be amiable and fair, and shall not be long with her first husband, and after she shall inioy ano∣ther by her good and true service, and she shall have honour and victory of her enemies, shee shall suffer pain in the stomack, she shall be wise, and have wounds in her shoulder, she ought to fear her later daies, which shall be doubtfull by venim, and she shall live lxx. year after nature. The days of Mars and of Saturn to them been right greeable, and the days of Iupiter to them been contrary, they shall be sweet of word and pricking with their tail, and will murmure, detracting other, and say otherwise then they would be said by.

Of the sign of Sagittarius.

[illustration]

YE ought to know that he which is born under Sagittarius, from mid Novem∣ber to mid December, shall have good effect, and shal have mercy of every man the which he seeth, he shall obtain and have by revelation, he shall go far to desert places unknown and dangerous, and shall return with gaines, he shall see his fortune increase from day to day, he will not hide that that he hath, he shall have some signes in his hands or feet, he shall be fearfull, at xxii. year he shall have some perill, he shall passe the sea to his lucre, and shall live lxxxii. year and viii. monthes after nature.

The woman that is born in this time shall love to labour, she shall have divers thoughts for strange strifes, and may not see one weep, she shall have victory over her enemies, she shall spend much silver by evill company, she shall be called mother of sons, and shall suffer many evils, she shall take great pain, to the end that she may have goods of her kinsemen. She ought to be marryed at xiii. year, and she shall have pain in her eyes at xiv. year, and shall have great ioy at xviii▪ year she shall suffer dolour by envy, and shall be separate from ioy, and shall live lxxii. year after nature. The days of Venus and Luna been right good, the days of Mars and Saturn been evill, and as well the man as the woman, shall be inconstant and unstable in deeds, they shall be of good conscience and mercifull, better to strangers then to themselves, and they will love God.

Of the sign of Capricornus.

[illustration]

HE the which is born under Capricornus, from mid December to mid Ianuary, shall be ••racundious, a fornicatour, a lyer, and shall be always labouring, and shal be nourished with strange things, he shall have many crimes and noyses, hee shall be a governour of beasts with four feet, he shall not be long with his wife, he shall suffer much sor∣row and heavinesse in his youth, he shal leave many goods and riches, he shall have a great perill at xvi. year, shall be of a great courage, he shall haunt honest people, and shall bee rich by women, and shall be conductour of maidens, his brethren will make divers espyings upon him, and he shall live lxx. year and four months after nature.

The woman that is born in this time shall be honest and fearful, she shal surmount her enemies, and have children of three men, she will go many pilgrimages in her youth, and after have great wit, she shall have great goods, she shall have pain in her eyes, and shall be in her best estate at xxx. year, and shall live lxx. year and four monthes after nature. The days of Saturn and of Mars to them been good, the days of Sol been contrary. And both man and woman shall be reasonable and envious.

Of the sign Aquarius.

[illustration]

THe man that is born under the sign of Aqua∣rius, from mid Ianuary unto mid February, shall be lovely and irefull, he will not beleeve in vain, he shall have silver, at xxiv year he shall be in estate, he shall win where he goeth, or he shall be sore sick and shall be hurt with iron, he shall have fear on the water and afterward shall have good fortune, and shall goe into divers strange countryes. The woman that is born in this time shal be delicious, and have many noises for her children, she shall be in great perill, at the age of xxiv year▪ she shall be in felicitie, she shall have domage by beasts with four feet, she shall live lxxvii▪ year after nature. The days of Venus and of Luna be right good for them, the days of Mars and Saturn been contrary: and both the man and the woman shall be reason∣able, and they shall not be over rich.

Of the sign of Pisces.

[illustration]

HE that is born under the signe of Pisces, from mid February to mid March, shall be a great goer, a fornicatour, and mocker, and shall be covet∣ous, he will say one thing and doe another, hee shall find money, hee will trust in his sapience, and shall have good fortune, he shall be a defender of Orphe∣lius, and widdowes, hee shall be fearfull on water, he shall passe soon all his adversities, and shall live lxxiii. year and v. months after nature.

The woman that is born in this time shall be delicious, familier in iests, pleasant of carriage, fervent, and shall have sicknesse in her eyes, and shall be sorrowfull by shame. Her husband will leave her, and she shall have much pain with strangers, she shall not have her own, she shall have pain in her stomack, and she shall live lxxvii. year after nature. The days of Mars and of Saturn to them been contrary, and both the man and the woman shall live faithfully.

Thus endeth the Nativities of men and women after the twelve signes.

CHAP. LIV. Here after followeth the ten Christian Nations.

I Pretend in this little treatise to speak of divers Christian nati∣ons, the which be divided in x. of the which I will declare as I have found written in the latine tongue, and will redige it to our English maternal, as Shepheards speaketh in the fields, after the capacity of mine understanding. And if in so doing I have erred, I require all other Shepheards for to excuse my youth, and to amend where as I have made default. And where as I have fayled, I submit mee unto amendment: for against amends no man may be.

The first Nation is of Latines.

IN the Nation of Latines, for the superiours is the Emperour, and many Kings. That is to wit, the most Christian & redoubt∣ed King of England and of France, with many noble Dukes, Earles, Viscountes, Barons and Knights, and is the na∣tion most resplendishing of all other in honour, force and chivalry. In the nation of Spain been the Kings of Castile, of Aragon, of Portingale of Navarre, and other Lords. In the Nation of Italie is the King of Cicile, and the King of Naples, and many other Lords, as of Ve∣nice, Florence, and Gaone. In Almayne beside the Emperour is divers Kings, as of Scotland, Hungary, Boheme, Poloney, Asia, Fryse, Ruisse, Hornegy, Almacie and Croacy, and many other Lordshipps that been under the obedience of the Catholike Church.

The second nation is of Greeks.

HOrace complaineth speaking of this nation of Greece, for the vexation that it hath had in times past. The Greeks have the Patriark of Con∣stantinople, Arch-bishops and Abbots to the spiritualty, and to the tem∣poralty, Emperours, Dukes, and Earles. They be now but of smal num∣ber, for Agariens and Turks have taken the greatest part of Greece, the which part obeyeth not the catholike Church for their errour. They been condemned by the Church for that they say. Spiritus Sanctus non procedit a filio

The third Nation is of Armenians.

WE read that the Nation of Armenians is nigh Antioch, they use all one language in the divine service and in holy scripture, as who should sing English in the Church, and both the men and women understand all. They have their Primate, which they call Catholike, to whom they obey as to the king in great devotion and reverence. They fast the Lent and eate no fish, and they drink no wine, and eat flesh on the Saturday.

The fourth Nation is of Georgians.

THis Nation is called Georgians of St. George, of whom they bear the Image in battaile, and he is their Patron. They been in the parts Oriential and been strong and delicious, half Persians and half Assyrians, and they speak foul and foolish language, and make their sacraments as the Greeks. The preists have their crownes round raised on their heads, and the clarkes have them square. When they goe to the holy Sepulcher they pay no tribute to the Sarazins, they enter into Ierusalem, their standards displaid, for the Sarazins feareth them, the women use armors as the men. When they write to the Soldan, incontinent that which they demand is granted them.

The fift Nation is of Assuriens.

I Find also by writing, that the Nation of Suriens hath taken the name of a citie named Sur, the which is the most eminent, and most upholden among all other cities and townes of the countrey of Surrey. These people for their vulgar and com∣mon speech speaketh the language Sarazionis, their holy scriptures, divi∣nities, and offices of the service in the Greek. They have the Bishops, & keep constitutions of the Greeks and obey them in all things. They sa∣crifice with raised bread, and have opinions of the Greekes as the Latines. There be some Christian men in the holy land that ensueth them, and been called Samaritans, which were converted in the time of the Apostles, but they be not perfect Christian men.

The sixt Nation is of Mororabins.

SOmetime were wont to bee a Nation of people in the country of Affrick and Spain called Mororabiens, but now they been but few. They bee called Mororabiens, for that in many things they held the use in Christian men being in Araby, they use the language of Latin in the divine offices & sacred things, and obey to the Church and to the Prelates of the Latines. They confesse them in the language Azymonien or in Latin. They bin dif∣ferent to the Latines, for that in their divine offices they have the hours to long. And for the day, is divided in xxiv, hours of night and day, so many offices, hours, Psalmes, and all other Orizons have they along, the which they say not after the custome of the Latines, for that that the Latins say in the begining, they say in the end, or in the middst. Some divideth the holy sacraments in vii. parts and other in x. This is a right devout nation, they conioyn no persons by mariage, but if they be born in their own countrey and land, the strangers be not received in mariage. And when a man lees∣eth his wife by death, he will never be wedded againe but live in chastity. The cause of so great diversity among Christian men, was for that in time past the Christians were let and not constrained to celebrate councell ge∣neral. For this cause there arose divers heretikes in many parts. For there was none that might remedy it.

The seventh Nation is of Prester Johns land in Indie.

THen is the land of Indie whereof Prester Iohn is. For his might is so great that it exceedeth all christendom. This Prester Iohn hath under him lxx. kings, the which do to him obeisance and homage, and when hee rideth about his country hee maketh to be borne afore him a Crosse of wood. And when he will go to battaile he maketh two to be borne before him, one of gold, and the other of precious stones, and in that land is the body of St. Thomas the Apostle buryed in a Tombe of stone, and one of his hands is out of the Tombe, and that hand every body may see that goeth thether.

The eight Nation is of Jacobites.

FOllowing after the Nation of Iacobits, the which been named St. Iames the disciple of Alexander the Patriarck. These Ia∣cobites have taken and occupied a great part of Asia, in the parts Occidentall, and the land of Mambre that is in Egypt, and the Land of Ethiopians unto Indie, with more then xx. Realms. The children of that Country bee circumcised and baptised with an hot yron, for they have printed the Character of the Crosse on their fore∣heads, and on other parts of the body, as on the armes and the brest▪ they shrive them onely to God, and not to the preists. In this Province the In∣dians, and Agarenoriens say that Iesus Christ hath only but the nature

divine. Some among them speaketh the language of Calde and Araby, and divers other that speaketh other languages, after the diversities of nations, They were condemned at the councell of Calcedony.

The ninth Nation is of Nescoriens.

OF Nescorianus that was of Constantinople, hath bin made this name Nescoriens. These Nescorians putteth in Iesus Christ two persons, one divine, and another humain, and they deny our Lady to be the mother of God, but they say well, Iesus to be man, they speak the language of Caldee, and sacrifice the body of Iesus Christ with raised bread. They inhabit in Tartary and in great Inde, they be in great number, their countrey containeth almost as much as Almaigne and Italy.

The tenth Nation of Moroniens.

RObust is the Nation of Moronyens, called of an heretick of Mo∣rone. They put in Iesus Christ (one understanding and one will) they inhabit in Libia in the province of Venice, and be a great number, they use specially bows and arrowes, and they have bells, Their Bishopes have rings, Miters, and Crosses as the Lattines: they use the letter of Caldee in their divine scriptures, and in their vulgar speech they use the letter of Araby. They have been under the obedience and lordship of the most holy and sacred Church Romain; their Patriark was at the general councell of saint Iohn de Latran, celebrate at Rome under Pope Innocent the third, but since then they be returned. They were first condemned at the councel of Constantinople, and since been returned to the obedience of the Romain Church, and yet returned againe to their false and evill opinions wherein they persevere.

CHAP. LV. Here beginneth a few proverbs.

THese proverbs be good to mark, The which followeth in this book: Be thou never so great a clark, Disdaine not on them to look.

The first is, man be content, As God hath set thee in degree: Each man may not have land and rent, It were not convenient so to bee.

If thou have not worldly goods at will, Therefore care nothing, by the rede of me:

[illustration]

Do well, and Gods commandement fulfill▪ For every man may not a goldsmith be.

He that hath a penny in his purse, If he the right way of Gods law hold, He shall come to heaven as soon I wusse As a King▪ that weareth on a crown of gold.

Also there is of men, full many a score, And each of then doth keep well his wife: Which never had a noble in store. And yet they live a full merry life.

And also another, forget it nat, Keep your own home as doth a mouse: For I tell you, the devil is a wily cat, He will spye you in another mans house.

And in especiall God to please, Desire thou never none other mans thing: Remember that many fingers is wel at ease, That never ware on no gay gold ring.

And this I tell you, for good and all, Remember it you that be wise: That man or woman hath a great fall, The which slide down and do never rise.

And one also forget not behind, That man or woman is likely good to be, That banisheth malice out of their mind, And sleepeth every night in charity.

I read you work by good counsell, For that man is worthy to have care, That hath twise faln into a well, And yet the third time cannot beware.

Say that a fryer told you this, He is wise that doth forsake sin: Then may we come to heavens blisse, God give us grace, that place to winne.

[illustration]

O Ye Clerkes famous and eloquent, Cunning is caught by reading and exercise, Of noble matters full exc••llent And remembreth what Salomon saith the wise, That praiseth businesse, and idlenesse doth dispise▪ And saith, he that many books doth read and see, It is full likely wisdome have shall hee.

Remember Clearks dayly doth their diligence, Into our corrupt speech matters to translate, Yet between French and English is great difference, Their langing in reading is douse and delicate, In their mother tongue, they be so fortunate. They have the Bible and the Apocalipse of divinitie, With other noble books that now in English be.

And remember readers, where ever ye go, That Honey is sweet, but cunning is sweeter, Caton the great Cleark, sometimes said so, How gold is good, and learning much better, Yet many full good be, that never knew letter. And yet vertuous, none can be of living, But first of Preists and Clerks, they must have learning.

Wherefore with patience▪ I you all desire, Beware of the rising of false heresie: Let every perfect faith set your hearts afire, And the chaffe from the corn cleane out to try. They that beleeveth amisse, be worthy to die. And he is the greatest fool in this world iwis: That thinketh no mans wit so good as his.

Thus endeth the Shepheards Kalender Drawn into English to Gods reverence. And for profit and pleasure shall Clerks to cheer, Plainly shewed to their intelligence, Ours is done, now readers do your diligence. And remember that the Printer saith to you this, He that liveth well may not die amiss.

[illustration]

FINIS.